JP6892703B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and if the determination determines that the special game is to be executed, the special game is executed. ..

Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that perform an effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of a jackpot on the condition that an operation means such as an operation button is operated at a predetermined timing. For example, in Patent Document 1, when there is an effect for urging a player to operate a button and an operation input is made via an operation button, a game state such as a future big hit or an effect of a character is displayed. A production that suggests change is performed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-188506

However, if the mere operation of the operation buttons as described above triggers the execution of an effect that suggests a change in the expected degree of jackpot or a game state, the effect of the effect may be poor. Therefore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there is a demand for a game machine in which the production that triggers the suggestion of the expectation of a big hit is not limited to the simple operation of the operation buttons.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming in view of the above background.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when the starting condition is satisfied, a first operating means that can be operated by the player, and a game. A gaming state having a second operating means that is operable by a person and different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state in which it is easier to determine that the special game is performed than the normal gaming state. It is possible to execute a game state control means for controlling the above, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. Using the effect determination table, the effect control means for determining the variable effect, the movable means movable from the first position to the second position, and the movable means using the specific effect determination table in the specific game state. A movable control means for moving the means from the first position to the second position is provided.
The effect control means has a reach effect that is easier to execute when it is determined that the special game is to be performed than when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not performed, and the special game determination. When an effect including a notification effect for notifying the determination result of the special game by the means and an effect including the effect are executed, and the movable control means controls an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means by the effect control means. Compared to the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled , the operation of the second operation means is performed after the start of the reach effect and before the notification effect is executed by the effect control means. It is possible to easily control the movable means from the first position to the second position before the operation effect for prompting is executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a partial perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol, and (b) is a diagram representing a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for big hit winning, (b) is a diagram representing a special symbol determination table for small hit winning, and (c) is a diagram representing a special symbol determination table for losing. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table, (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot opening / closing control table for the first jackpot game, and (c) is a diagram showing a jackpot opening / closing control table for the second jackpot game. (D) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a third big hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a small hit game control table, and (b) is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing a game condition data determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 1st to 30th variation in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the variation 31st to 74th times in a high probability game state and a time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the 75th to 84th variation in a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. (A) is a diagram representing a hit determination table for a normal symbol, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table, and (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. FIG. 6 (e) is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and FIG. 3 (f) is a diagram showing a second start opening opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area, and (c) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area. The figure which shows the structure, (d) is the figure which shows the structure of each storage part of the ordinary symbol hold storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation pattern determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis processing in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis processing of FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect type determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode setting process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the effect mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for every variation effect pattern of effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of an effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for every variation effect pattern of effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of an effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of an effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which stores the setting contents for each type of each special effect that can be executed in the variation effect of an effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for a low probability game state and a non-time saving game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect determination table for a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio output determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for big hit, small hit. It is a figure which shows the degree of the jackpot expectation degree of a specific production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a variation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image. (A) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the normal effect button, (b) is a diagram for schematically explaining the state of the effect button at the time of a specific effect, and (c). Is a diagram for schematically explaining a state in which image output and audio output are performed at the time of a specific effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result which is stopped display as a result of a variable display. It is a figure which shows the display example 1 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the display example 2 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. (A) is a diagram showing display example 3 of information displayed on the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device, and (b) is the first game information display device and the second. It is a figure which shows the display example 4 of the information displayed on the game information display device and the first image display device. It is a figure which shows the first half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the latter half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the display example 6 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device in the disassembled state. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st display board. It is a rear view of the 1st display board. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is a schematic diagram which shows the control configuration which concerns on the 1st game information display device. It is a front view around the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the covering member and the identification means. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is sectional drawing in the disassembled state of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control configuration which concerns on the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is the schematic which shows the control configuration which concerns on the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the 2nd game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display device. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern, and the timing chart. It is an animation figure which shows that a plurality of operation means can operate. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example which concerns on a state transition, and is the figure which shows the 6th specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation pattern and the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example which concerns on a state transition, and is the figure which shows the fluctuation pattern and the 7th concrete example of the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example which concerns on a state transition, and is the figure which shows the variation pattern and the 8th specific example of the distribution of the operation means which concerns on a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example which concerns on a state transition, and is the figure which shows the 9th specific example of the distribution of the fluctuation pattern and the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 6th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 7th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 8th specific example which concerns on a state transition.

Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “the present embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A through which the gaming ball flows down. It has a game board 2 and a game board 2.

The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island equipment of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism portion H on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum, the front portion of the game area 2A and the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 visibly covers the game area 2A with the game board 2 closed.

Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. The lock by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

The glass door Y2 is provided with a saucer 50 for storing a plurality of game balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of launching the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launcher (not shown) capable of launching the game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launching device is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game ball stored in the saucer 50 is supplied to the game ball launcher.

The launch operation device 3 has a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2 and a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launching device launches a game ball with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (hereinafter, referred to as “game ball launch strength”).

In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, a curved inner rail member 29B, an outer rail member 29C, and a game ball are arranged directly under the large winning opening 8 described later. A guide member 29D having a guide path formed on the upper surface thereof is provided at the second start port 7.

The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. An image display device 14 made of a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Further, at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided.

The inner rail member 29B is arranged outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is arranged outside the inner rail member 29B. The game ball launched with a predetermined game ball firing intensity rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. A plurality of nails and windmills are provided in the game area 2A. The game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails or windmills.

A plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 11 are provided in the game area 2A. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detection sensor 11a, and when the general winning opening detection sensor 11a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. ..

Further, on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A, a first winning gate 9 through which the game ball can pass is provided. Further, a second winning gate 10 through which the game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9 and 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a for detecting a game ball. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect the game ball. The ordinary symbol lottery will be described later.

At the lower part of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting port 6 which is immutable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a that detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery is performed on the condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects the game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A variable second starting port 7 is provided directly below the first starting port 6. The second starting port 7 is controlled by the second starting port control device 70 in either a basic mode (closed mode) in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode (open mode) in which a prize can be won. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a that detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery is performed on the condition that the second starting port detection sensor 7a detects the game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

The normally movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that a predetermined condition is satisfied), the movable piece 70A is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting port 7 is closed. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes the basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A rotates forward around a rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special aspect of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normally movable piece 70A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

The predetermined condition for the second start port control device 70 is that the winning normal symbol is determined in the above-mentioned ordinary symbol lottery.

A variable large winning opening 8 is provided on the downstream side of the second winning gate 10. The grand prize opening 8 is controlled by the grand prize opening control device 80 in either a basic mode in which a prize cannot be won or a special mode in which a prize can be won. The large winning opening 8 is provided with a large winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the large winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The special winning opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a driving unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except that certain conditions are satisfied), the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the large winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic aspect of the large winning opening 8.

On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A rotates forward around the rotation axis formed at the lower end portion to open the large winning opening 8. The big winning opening 8 is controlled in a special mode in which the ball can be entered. The opening of the large winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special aspect of the large winning opening 8. When the special winning opening 8 is opened, the special movable piece 80A is in a state of protruding from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the large winning opening 8.

The predetermined condition for the large winning opening control device 80 is the above-mentioned first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery". ”), It is determined to be a big hit special symbol or a small hit special symbol.

On the surface of the game board 2, the first special symbol 1st indicator 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61, the normal symbol 1st indicator 62, the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63, and the 2nd special A symbol holding first display 64 and a normal symbol holding first display 65 are provided. The display device provided with these is referred to as a first game information display device 59. Further, on the surface of the game board 2, the first special symbol holding second indicator 83, the second special symbol holding second indicator 84, the normal symbol holding second indicator 85, the right-handed second indicator 87, and the second display 1 Special symbol 2nd display 88, 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 89, and normal symbol 2nd indicator 90 are provided. The display device provided with these is referred to as a second game information display device 79.

The first special symbol first display 60 is a variable display device for displaying the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting port 6, and the second special symbol first display. The vessel 61 is a variable display device that displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

In the first special symbol lottery, when the game ball enters the first starting port 6, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and whether the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to "big hit". It means to judge whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7, a random value for jackpot determination is acquired, and whether the acquired random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value corresponding to "big hit". It means to judge whether or not.

When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 based on the lottery result, and the first special representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. The stop display of the symbol is performed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol first display 61.

For example, the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the special symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

The normal symbol first display 62 is a variable display device that displays the result of a normal symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10. In the ordinary symbol lottery, when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, a random value for hit determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired random value for collision determination is a random value corresponding to "win". It refers to the processing to be performed.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol first display 62 performs variable display of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and stops the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 62 is a notification of the lottery result.

For example, each of the ordinary symbol first display 62 is provided with a plurality of LEDs. In the variation display of the normal symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol first display 62 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery lights up.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the starting ports 6 and 7 during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the large winning opening control device 80 is activated, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and special. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a certain condition, an upper limit value is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended from the variable display. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6 and 7. That is, up to four rights to execute the variable display of the special symbol can be reserved for each of the starting ports 6 and 7.

1st special symbol hold The 1st display 63 holds the number of variable displays of the 1st special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "1st special symbol variable display") (U1: hereinafter referred to as "1st special symbol reserved number"). Is displayed. The second special symbol hold 1st display 64 holds the number of the second special symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol variation display") (U2: hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol hold number"). Is displayed. The first special symbol holding first display 63 and the second special symbol holding first display 64 are each provided with, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and a predetermined LED is turned on according to the number of holdings.

Similarly, the upper limit of the number of reserved symbols is set to 4 for the variable display of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "variable display of ordinary figures"), and the number of pending figures (G: hereinafter referred to as "number of reserved figures"). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold first display 65. The normal symbol hold first display 65 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of normal symbol hold.

Further, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect devices are an image display device 14, an audio output device 15, an effect lighting device 16, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect. It is composed of an accessory device 1703. An image display device 14, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and an audio output device 15 and an effect lighting device are provided. 16 is provided on the glass door Y2.

The image display device 14 displays various still images and moving images to produce an image effect. In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

The first production accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. Further, the second effect accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. Further, the third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each effecting accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation. The audio output device 15 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like to produce an audio effect. The effect lighting device 16 performs the effect by lighting by changing the irradiation direction and the emission color of the light of each lamp.

As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by driving control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the first decorative member 17A moves from the "standby position 1" (original position) above the image display device 14 to the "operating position 1-1" (operation position 1-1) which is the central position on the front surface of the image display device 14. Move to the position after movement). Further, the first decorative member 17A moves from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 via the "operating position 1-1". To do. The first decorative member 17A either performs a moving operation such as moving from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" and then returning to the "standby position 1", or moves from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1". After moving to the "operating position 1-2" via "-1", the movement operation such as returning to the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1" is performed.

Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the second decorative member 17B is tilted to the left from the "standby position 2" (original position), which is the position on the right side of the image display device 14, with the lower part of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and the image display device 17B is tilted to the left. It moves to "operation position 2" (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of 14. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", the second decorative member 17B then stands up on the right side with the lower part of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum and returns to the "standby position 2" (original position). Performs a moving operation such as returning.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the third decorative member 17C is tilted to the right from the "standby position 3" (original position), which is the lower left position of the image display device 14, with the lower part of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum, and the image is displayed. It moves to the "operating position 3" (the position after the movement), which is the position on the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the "standby position 3" to the "operating position 3", it then stands up on the left side with the lower part of the third decorative member 17Cc as a fulcrum and returns to the "standby position 3" (original position). Operations such as returning are possible.
The first decorative member 17A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C are not limited to the shapes and operating modes described here.

Further, the saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described later.

The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A as an operable "first operation means" and an effect button operation detection switch 18a for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 18A.

The effect button 18A has a non-protruding state (FIG. 2 (a)) in which the effect button 18A is a normal operation position and a projecting state (FIG. 2 (b)) in which the effect button 18A protrudes to an operation position above the non-projection state. , The state at the time of detecting the pressing operation is configured to be changeable to a state of retracting downward from the non-protruding state (FIG. 2C).
In the non-protruding state, the effect button 18A is in a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the saucer 50.
Further, in the protruding state, the effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) upward from the surface around the saucer 50 as compared with the non-protruding state.
Further, the effect button 18A retracts slightly downward from the surface around the saucer 50, and is in a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 18 has a structure in which the effect button 18A can be changed into a non-protruding state, a protruding state, and a pressing state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the effect button 18A in the non-protruding state or the protruding state is pressed to be in the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected, and then when the pressing operation is released, the pressing operation returns to the non-protruding state.

The direction in which the effect button 18A moves between the non-protruding position, the protruding position, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressing position) is defined as the advancing / retreating direction of the effect button 18A.

When the effect button 18A is in a state where the pressing operation is detected, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the complete pressing operation of the effect button 18A has been detected to the lamp control board 104. To do.

Further, when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state, the projecting state detection switch 18a21 sends a projecting state detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A is held at the maximum projecting position (protruding state position) on the lamp control board 104. Output to.

Further, the effect button 18A has a transparent member capable of transmitting light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

Further, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, the effect button 18A can vibrate (reciprocate) in the vertical direction (advance / reciprocating direction) from the non-protruding state, and the vibration speeds are low speed vibration and high speed vibration. There are two stages. It is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 18A is vibrating, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 18A. When the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating at low speed, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "poco ... poco ...", and when the effect button 18A is vibrating at high speed, the player When the player touches the effect button 18A, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "pocopocopocopoco".

Further, at the left end of the glass door Y2, an effect lever device 19 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described later is provided.

The effect lever device 19 includes an effect lever 19A as an operable "second operation means" and an operation detection switch 19a for detecting the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operation stick that can be grasped by the player and is attached so as to be tilted in the vertical direction, and the operation detection switch 19a detects the downward tilting operation of the effect lever 19A.

In the present embodiment, a state in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the "first operation means" or the effect lever 19A as the "second operation means" is enabled is referred to as an "operation valid state". The sub CPU 102a controls to execute a predetermined effect by operating the operation means for which the operation is valid in the "operation valid state". Examples of this "operation valid state" include an "operation valid period" consisting of a predetermined predetermined period, and an example in which the "operation valid state" is established when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The effect device executes various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As the production, for example, there is a special symbol lottery production that is performed with the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery as an opportunity. The special drawing lottery effect is performed on the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, the variable display of the special effect symbol and the stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

The variable display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol fluctuates for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode. The stop display of the special effect symbol is performed in response to the stop display of the special effect (hereinafter, when the variable display and the stop display of the special effect symbol are collectively referred to, it is referred to as "special effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the special effect symbol, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode indicating the result of the special effect lottery.

The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, "1" to "9") arranged in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. It consists of decorative patterns that represent numbers). In the variable display of the special effect symbol, the special decorative symbol in each row moves from top to bottom (variable display) as if the reel is rotating. The mode of variable display of the special effect symbol is not limited to this. Further, during the variable display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

On the other hand, in the stop display of the special effect symbol, the above three rows of special decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 and the like. The arrangement of the special decorative symbols on the predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the stop display of the special effect symbol is performed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

In addition to the special symbol lottery effect, a roulette effect that is performed by the ordinary symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a variable display or special game of the special symbol are performed for a predetermined period. Various productions such as demonstration productions performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back surfaces of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal configuration of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

The power supply board 107 includes a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, The power failure detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power failure detection signal reaches a high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal reaches a low level, the main CPU 101a enters an operation stop state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a large winning opening detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are performed via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. When each detection sensor detects a game ball, it outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101.

On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating a normally movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70 and a large winning opening control are provided via an output port (not shown). A large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 70B and the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, the first special symbol 1st display 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, and the normal symbol 1st display 62 are provided via an output port (not shown). , The first special symbol hold 1st display 63, the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64, and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling each display device to each display device 60 to 69.

Further, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information about a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal plate 108. The game information output terminal plate 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the game machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the above-mentioned predetermined game information (external signal).

The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102 so as to be communicable. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

An effect button operation detection switch 18a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

The effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104 when the effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position. To do. The lamp control board 104 outputs the effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a to the effect control board 102.

When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs an effect lever operation detection signal indicating that the effect lever 19A is tilted to the lamp control board 104. When the effect lever operation detection signal is input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the effect control board 102.

The sub CPU 102a is a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button operation detection signal output from the effect button device 18, an effect lever operation detection signal output from the effect lever device 19, and a timer (crystal oscillator). Based on the input signal and the like, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on this arithmetic processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. .. The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be communicable.

A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32, and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 to detect the rotation angle.

Further, the payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. When the payout control board 103 receives the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, the payout control board 103 permits the firing solenoid 41 to be energized.

Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated and the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 changes, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the knob 32b of the firing volume is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this way, the payout control board 103 energizes and controls the firing solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing device 4. Since one game ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

Further, a payout drive unit 51 of a payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to a player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b and performs arithmetic processing based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 103a.

The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above-mentioned boards. An effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected to the output side of the lamp control board 104.

The lamp CPU 104a controls the light emission of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiates the light of the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to the effect control (hereinafter, referred to as “effect control command”) transmitted from the effect control board 102. Drive control is performed on the motor to change the direction. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control for the solenoid and the motor that operate the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a causes the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18 to emit light of the drive control for the electric motor 18b that moves the effect button 18A between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command, and the LED 1821d of the effect button device 18. Controls light emission.

An effect button operation detection switch 18a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

When the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a is input to the lamp control board 104, the input detection signal is output to the effect control board 102. .. That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button operation detection signal and the effect lever operation detection signal between the effect control board 102 and the effect button device 18 and the effect lever device 19.

The image control board 105 generates an image signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14, and the sound to be output to the sound output device 15. It has a voice generation unit 105C that generates the voice signal according to the above and outputs the voice signal to the voice output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

The control unit 105A of the image control board 105 includes a control CPU 105Aa, a control ROM 105Ab, and a control RAM 105Ac to control the image display by the image display device 14.

The centralized CPU 105Aa is connected to a centralized ROM 105Ab in which a control program or the like is stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the centralized CPU 105Aa is read out. When the general CPU 105Aa receives a command related to the effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the control CPU 105Aa gives an instruction of an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 to the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also gives an instruction to the sound generation unit 105C to display the image. An instruction of the voice to be output from the voice output device 15 is given.

The centralized RAM 105Ac functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the centralized CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores the data read from the centralized ROM 105Ab.

Further, the control ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, and is a program for controlling the control process of the control ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. , Various information such as a duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14 is included.

The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba which is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and a VRAM 105Bc having a frame buffer for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

The VDP105Ba is connected to the CGROM105Bb in which the image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on the instruction from the control CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material representing an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, an individual image such as a decorative pattern image or a background image such as a landscape, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes the background of the decorative pattern. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM105Bb is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image.

Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 105Bb may be configured such that not all the image data is compressed but only a part of the image data is compressed. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP105Ba. The VDP105Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

Next, the details of the various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 13.

4 (a) and 4 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 4A is a table (big hit determination table for the first special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 7.

Each jackpot decision table is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value) (hereinafter referred to as "low probability jackpot determination table"). It is composed of a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "high probability jackpot determination table") that is referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by collating the big hit determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the big hit determination table, "big hit" and "small" Either "hit" or "miss" is determined.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the jackpot game accompanied by the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result. If the result of the big hit determination is "small hit", the small hit game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result. If the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game is executed.

In addition, in the variable effect as the special figure lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot winning. As the reach effect, for example, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the above-mentioned special symbol decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left side area, the center area, and the right side area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14. (A part of the effect symbol is displayed as a pseudo stop), and if the predetermined special symbol decorative symbol stops on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, the special symbol decorative symbol representing the winning of the jackpot will be arranged. There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called "reach state") occurs. If the result of the jackpot judgment is "missing", the result of the jackpot judgment is still "missing" even in the dramatic specific state of this reach state.

After a reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called "super reach production") that raises the expectation of winning a big hit may or may not be performed in a developmental manner. In addition, the reach state does not always occur in the reach production. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to raise the expectation of the player to win the big hit without the reach state occurring. If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

5 (a) to 5 (c) are diagrams showing an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and is a type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 based on the result of the jackpot determination. (Stop display mode of special symbol) is to be determined.

The special symbol determination table is roughly divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5 (a) shows a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", and FIG. 5 (b) shows the case where the result of the jackpot determination is "small hit". The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “missing”.

Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start port (first start port 6 or second start port 7) at which the game ball that triggers the special symbol determination is entered.

In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the stop display is displayed by collating the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 with the special symbol determination table. A special design is decided. The special symbol stop symbol data and the special effect symbol designation command are set as the identification information of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The special symbol stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the special effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102. The special effect symbol designation command is generated at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol storage determination process in step S310) and transmitted to the effect control board 102.

The special effect symbol designation command is for identifying a special symbol display device (first special symbol first display 60 or second special symbol first display 61) in which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It is composed of 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying a special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Regarding the special effect symbol designation command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it means that the stop display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol 1st display 60, and if the MODE data is "E4H", it means that the stop display is performed. 2nd special symbol Indicates that the stop display of the special symbol is performed on the first display 61. The special effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E3H" is the "first special effect symbol designation command", and the special effect symbol designation command whose MODE data is "E4H" is the "second special effect symbol designation command". ".

FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot game control table used when controlling a jackpot game.

The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the jackpot 8 and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. The designated command, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and the ending. An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

6 (b) to 6 (d) are diagrams showing an example of a big winning opening opening / closing control table for a big hit game used when controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8. FIG. 6 (b) is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game that constitutes the jackpot game.

The jackpot opening / closing control table for the jackpot game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 8 during the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), which is the number of the round game, and the special electric power, which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the large winning opening 8 are set.

FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a small hit game control table used when controlling a small hit game.

The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As a condition for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the small hit game to the first opening of the large winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command to be performed, the type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are associated with the type of small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a large winning opening opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening 8. The large winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening 8 during the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the large winning opening 8, the round number (R), the special electric operation number (K) which is the opening number of the large winning opening 8 (operation of the large winning opening control device 80), and the large winning opening The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the mouth 8 are set.

FIG. 8A is a diagram showing an example of a game condition data determination table to be referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information representing game conditions newly set (variable) after the jackpot game when a jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the winning probability of the jackpot at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the winning probability of the jackpot (low probability game state / high probability game state), and in each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) and the game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

The game condition data is composed of 2 bytes of data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents the winning probability of the jackpot newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", the jackpot winning probability is set to a high probability (high probability game state) after the jackpot game, and if it is "00H", the jackpot winning probability is low probability (low probability game) after the jackpot game. State) is set. On the other hand, the lower byte of the game condition data represents the ease of winning the start opening newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is "01H", it is set to be easy to win the starting mouth after the big hit game (time saving game state), and if it is "00H", it is difficult to win the starting mouth after the big hit game (non-time saving game state). ) Is set.

FIG. 8B is a diagram showing an example of a game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (at the time of the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot and the ease of winning the starting opening are set as the game conditions.

The game condition determination table includes game condition data, ON / OFF of each game condition, that is, a flag (high probability flag and time saving flag) indicating the game condition, and the number of times of variable display of a special symbol that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as "executable number of times") is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times the special symbol can be displayed means the specified number of times the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner according to the newly set game conditions. The number of times this special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of times the jackpot determination is determined.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, it is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state) after the jackpot game is completed. Set a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state).
In this specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state), the main CPU 101a terminates the specific gaming state when the number of jackpot determination determinations (the number of times the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. There is. In this way, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called "ST machine".

(Variation pattern determination table for special symbols)
9 to 12 are diagrams showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining an mode of variation display of a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure variation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the first to thirty times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
FIG. 11 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the 31st to 74th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
FIG. 12 shows when the special symbol variation pattern is determined when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won is the 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure variation pattern determination table which is referred.
It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern determination table referred to when determining the special variation pattern in the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when the third big hit is won, or the special figure variation pattern determination table when the small hit is won is referred to. The description of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table will be omitted.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8 (b)) of the main ROM 101b and confirms the current game state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the time saving flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the number of fluctuations in the variation display of the special symbol is confirmed, and the special symbol changes according to this gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuations. Select the pattern determination table.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 31 times, the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 is referred to. To do.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 31 to 74 times, the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 11 is referred to. To do.

Further, when it is determined that the main CPU 101a is currently in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 75 to 84 times, the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 12 is referred to. To do.

Further, when the main CPU 101a is currently in a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, or when a small hit is won, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data that reflects the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device (starting port related to the special symbol display) that operates in the special symbol display, and the special symbol. The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining the presence or absence of reach, and the special figure variation pattern determination value for determining the special figure variation pattern are stored.

In the main CPU 101a, when the special figure stop symbol data is "10H" to "17H", or "20H", "21H" (big hit, small hit), the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern acquired when the ball enters No. 7 is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data, and the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated. To determine.

Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H" (loss), the main CPU 101a confirms the number of special figure reservations (U1 or U2) related to the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. .. The main CPU 101a acquires a random number for reach determination and collates it with a reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed number of reserved special figures (U1 or U2) to determine whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss without reach". Alternatively, determine whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach".

Although the maximum number of "4" may be stored as the number of reserved special figures, when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss without reach" or the special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach". Does not refer to "4" as the number of reserved balls.

When the main CPU 101a determines "loss without reach", the main CPU 101a collates the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the "loss without reach". Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

When the main CPU 101a determines "loss with reach", the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the "loss with reach". Then, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined.

The main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern by determining the special symbol variation pattern (step S313-3) at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure fluctuation time"). The special symbol variation patterns are the first special symbol variation pattern, which is a mode of variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol first display 60, and the second special symbol first display 61. It is distinguished from the second special symbol variation pattern, which is an aspect of the variation display of the second special symbol to be displayed.

The main CPU 101a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is assigned at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has a jackpot winning expectation (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example,). The expectation (reliability) of winning the first jackpot and the second jackpot is associated with each other.

As will be described later, the sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the effect content based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101. In the rightmost column of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, for reference, the effect type of the variation effect determined by the sub CPU 102a is described in association with the special figure variation pattern designation command. ing.

Here, as the effect content, here, "symbol variation" means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed on the image display device 14.

In addition, "reach" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special effect symbols that notify the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effect symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of three-digit special effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying a jackpot, two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at "7", and the remaining special effects are temporarily stopped. It refers to a mode in which the effect pattern is fluctuating. The "temporary stop" refers to a mode in which the special production symbol fluctuates to the player due to a small shaking or small deformation of the special production symbol.

In the effect type of the variation effect shown in FIG. 9, "symbol variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" do not become the reach mode after the plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and are "lost" as the judgment result of the jackpot determination. It is a variable production that informs. The "design variation 1" is a "shortening variation" performed in an extremely short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. "Design variation 2" and "symbol variation 3" are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

Further, in the "normal reach" shown in FIG. 9, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed at the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed. It is a variable production that performs a reach production.

Further, the “normal reach → story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small hit. This "normal reach-> story reach" is a normal reach in which two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. After that, story reach will be performed as a reach production with higher expectations for big hits than normal reach. This story reach suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or small hit by going on a journey to find the pet dog whose character that appears in the challenge reach below has disappeared and finally finding the pet dog. It is a reach production consisting of a story of contents.

Further, the “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small hit. In this "design variation 2 → challenge reach", after "symbol variation 2", two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7), and also in the above story reach. The character who appears challenges the treasure hunt game in which the target item is searched from multiple treasure chests, and when the character acquires the item, it suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or small hit. It is a challenge reach of the content.

Further, the “design variation 3 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after the “symbol variation 3”.

Further, in the "normal reach-> super reach" shown in FIG. 9, after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). It is a variable production that performs a normal reach that displays a stop, and then performs a super reach that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach.

Further, in the "normal reach-> special reach" shown in FIG. 9, two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol is changed to display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production that performs a normal reach that displays a stop, and then performs a special reach that has a higher expectation for a big hit than the above-mentioned super reach.

Further, "normal reach-> super reach-> special reach" shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed, then a normal reach is performed, then a super reach is performed, and then a special reach is performed. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first jackpot where the stop symbol data is "10H" is "E6H0AH" and "E6H0BH" as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. , "E6H0CH", the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot where the stop symbol data is "11H" is "E6H0DH", "E6H0EH", "E6H0FH" as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. , The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is "18H" is "E6H09H" and "E6H08H" as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. , "E6H07H", the selection ratio decreases.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives "E6H0AH" as a variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a has "normal reach-> super reach" of "variation effect pattern A034" to "variation effect pattern A037". When "E6H0BH" is received as a variation pattern specification command from the main control board 101, "normal reach-> special reach" of "variation effect pattern A038" to "variation effect pattern A041" is performed. When it is decided to execute and "E6H0CH" is received as a variation pattern specification command from the main control board 101, "normal reach-> super reach-> special reach" of "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045". Decide to run.

Later, as the variation effect of the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A034", the "variation effect pattern A038", and the "variation effect pattern A042" will be described.
Regarding the degree of expectation for the jackpot of "variable effect pattern A034", "variable effect pattern A038", and "variable effect pattern A042", as can be seen from the above-mentioned selection ratios of "E6H0AH", "E6H0BH", and "E6H0CH". "Variation effect pattern A034" of "normal reach-> super reach" executed when the sub CPU 102a receives "E6H0AH", "variation effect" of "normal reach-> special reach" executed when the sub CPU 102a receives "E6H0BH" It can be said that the expectation for the jackpot increases as the pattern A038 ”and the“ variation effect pattern A042 ”of the“ normal reach → super reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the“ E6H0CH ”.

Further, in the "symbol variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol variation time is 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special figure fluctuation times are the "symbol variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time at the time of execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the "special figure variation pattern 30" for executing the "design variation 1", which has the shortest special figure variation time of 2 seconds, is 4 as shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of the "special symbol variation pattern 00" for executing the "symbol variation 1" in seconds.

Further, "design variation-> special character reach 1" to "symbol variation-> special character reach 6" shown in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B described later after the symbol variation that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production that performs a special character reach by. The details of this special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67.

Further, in the effect type of the variation effect shown in FIG. 11, "design variation 1" to "symbol variation 3" are variation effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed, and are variation effects corresponding to the special symbol variation time. The production time of is different.

In addition, "symbol variation-> attack reach 1" to "symbol variation-> attack reach 6" shown in FIG. 11 are attack reach in which different characters attack after the symbol variation that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. It is a variable production that performs. The details of this attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

Further, the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special map variation pattern for executing an extremely short variation effect such as a special map variation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, "rock-paper-scissors production (loss 1)"-"rock-paper-scissors production (loss 6)", "rock-paper-scissors production (win 1)"-"rock-paper-scissors production (win 3)", "rock-paper-scissors production (Aiko 1)" "Janken production (Aiko 3)" displays a plurality of special production symbols in a variable manner. After the symbol changes, the two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). It is a variable production that generates a reach state and performs "rock-paper-scissors production" in which two characters (a ally character and an opponent's character) perform rock-paper-scissors.

"Rock-paper-scissors effect (losing 1)" to "rock-paper-scissors effect (losing 6)" are variable effects executed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. Further, "rock-paper-scissors effect (win 1)" to "rock-paper-scissors effect (win 3)" are variable effects executed when the result of the jackpot determination is the first jackpot or the second jackpot. Further, "rock-paper-scissors production (Aiko 1)" to "rock-paper-scissors production (Aiko 3)" are variable effects executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "third jackpot" or "small hit".
The details of this "rock-paper-scissors effect" will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

In addition, a start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure variation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure variation pattern determination.

The special symbol variation pattern designation command identifies a special symbol display device (first special symbol first display 60 or second special symbol first display 61) on which variation display of the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is performed. It is composed of 1-byte MODE data for the purpose and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the special symbol variation pattern specification command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the first special symbol 1st display 60 performs the variation display of the special symbol, and if the MODE data is "E7H". , 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 indicates that the special symbol is variablely displayed.

The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E6H" is called the "first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command", and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is "E7H" is called the "second special figure fluctuation pattern designation command". Special figure fluctuation pattern specification command ".

The start port winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of start port and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. Regarding the start port winning designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it means that a game ball has entered the first start port 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", it means that the second start port 7 has been entered. Indicates that a game ball has entered. The start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "first start opening prize designation command", and the start opening prize designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is the "second start opening prize designation command". ".

13 (a) to 13 (f) show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol-based game based on winning a prize at the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

FIG. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game accompanied by opening the second starting port 7. As will be described later, the hit determination is performed based on the hit determination random numbers acquired based on the passage of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the game ball.

The winning decision table is divided according to the ease of winning the starting opening. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a hit determination table that is referred to in the time reduction game state.

In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired random number for hit determination with the hit determination table, either "hit" or "loss" is determined. If the "hit" is won, an auxiliary game involving the opening of the second starting port 7 is executed.

FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62. The ordinary symbol determination table is divided according to the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

In each normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol determination value and the stop-displayed normal symbol are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10 against the normal symbol determination table. As the identification information of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing on the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing on the effect control board 102.

FIG. 13C determines a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal symbol fluctuation pattern”) associated with a time required for displaying a fluctuation of a normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol fluctuation time”). It is a figure which shows the general drawing variation pattern determination table for this. The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a normal map variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-time saving game state and a normal map variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the time saving game state.

In each table, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more normal map fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined by collating the random number for determining the normal map fluctuation pattern, which is acquired when the game ball passes through the winning gates 9 and 10, with the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table. To.

A command for specifying a normal map fluctuation pattern is set corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal figure fluctuation pattern is determined. When the effect control board 102 receives the normal symbol variation pattern designation command, it is possible to start the variation display of the normal symbol from now on and to recognize the determination result of the normal symbol determination related to the variation display of the normal symbol. it can.

The normal map fluctuation pattern specification command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the game state related to the current start opening winning ease and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the normal map fluctuation pattern. There is. Regarding the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is "D6H", it means that it is in the non-time saving game state, and if the MODE data is "D7H", it means that it is in the time saving game state.

FIG. 13D is a diagram showing an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. Data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game is stored in this table. As shown in FIG. 13D, the auxiliary game reference data determination table is associated with the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal figure stop symbol data, and the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the start opening winning ease state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

FIG. 13 (e) is a diagram showing an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling an auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

FIG. 13 (f) is a diagram showing an example of a second start port open / close control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. The second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the second starting port 7 during the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, the normal electric operation number (D), which is the opening number of the second starting port 7 (operation of the second starting port control device 70) in the auxiliary game, and the second 2 The opening time and closing time (operating time, non-operating time) of the starting port 7 are set.

(Explanation of types of special games)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is the "big hit game" and the "small hit" that are executed when the "big hit" is won. It is composed of a "small hit game" that is executed when the player wins the game. The jackpot game is mainly divided into a "first jackpot game", a "second jackpot game", and a "third jackpot game" according to the difference in the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

In the jackpot game, a round game involving opening of the jackpot 8 at least once is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the large winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total of the times that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are preset. The reason why it is "can be opened" is that the number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the large winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Further, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the big winning opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. The maximum number of times the big winning opening 8 is opened and the maximum opening time in each round game may or may not be unified in each big hit game.

(Explanation of game conditions)
Next, the game conditions that are the conditions for the progress of the game will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as game conditions. Regarding the winning probability of the jackpot, the game progresses under the low probability game state or the high probability game state, and regarding the ease of winning the starting opening of the game ball, the game progresses under the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. To do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming condition is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state as a reference.

In the present embodiment, the low-probability gaming state regarding the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to 1/350, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the high-probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is higher than that of the low-probability gaming state, that is, it is set to 1/80, which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to win the jackpot than in the low-probability gaming state, and the number of jackpot winnings per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is in a state of being.

The non-time saving game state is a state in which the ease of winning a prize at the starting opening is normal. Specifically, in the non-time saving game state, the time required for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) is set to 15 seconds, and it operates when the "hit" is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operating time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in the hit determination for a normal symbol is 1 /. It means that it is set to 50. In addition, the "total opening time" means that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times for each hit, and the game ball can be won for each hit. This is because the number of balls is limited, and when the number of game balls wins, the game balls close without waiting for the opening time to elapse.

On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 (operating time of the second starting port control device 70) per unit time is longer than that in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Refers to a gaming state in which is likely to be in an open mode. Due to the relatively high ease of winning the starting opening, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be executed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol judgment per unit time, the larger the number of jackpot winnings per unit time, so the time-saving game state is non-time-saving. It can be said that the state is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, which is a hit. The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set more favorably for the player than in the non-time saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the second starting port 7 is opened twice through the closing (interval) for 1.0 second, but there is no such closing and it may be opened only once. Further, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

In the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the starting ports 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player launches the game balls by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the time-saving game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 7 as compared with the non-time-saving game state, so that the decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player can be suppressed. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the time-saving game state is set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving game state.

In this way, depending on the winning of the jackpot, the type of jackpot game (1st to 3rd jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low-probability game state or high-probability game state, and non-time-saving game state) Or the combination with the time saving game state) is decided. In view of this, the actual types of jackpots (types of jackpots based on the profit level enjoyed by the player) are the types of jackpot games to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game is completed ( It can be said that it is a combination with the game state). Therefore, in the following, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, the combination of the type of jackpot game guided by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, the type of profit enjoyed by the player is used. It is possible to classify the types of jackpots.

By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game (first jackpot game) with 16R (rounds) of rounds is executed, and then the jackpot is set to the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, which is called the "first jackpot". By winning, a jackpot game with a number of rounds of 4R (round) (“second jackpot game”) is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is called a “second jackpot”, and the jackpot By winning, a jackpot game with a number of rounds of 2R (round) (“third jackpot game”) is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state is referred to as a “third jackpot”.

If the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the game is in a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, even if a small hit is won, the game conditions do not change. That is, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the boot program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to the power being turned on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command to the effect that this initialization process has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure variation random number for determining the special figure variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number. ..

In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates the initial value random number composed of the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the like. After that, the processing of step S20 and step S30 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined cycles (4 milliseconds), so that the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a into the stack area.

In step S110, the main CPU 101a is a special game timer counter that performs update processing of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, update processing of the stop time of the special symbol, update processing of the opening time, update processing of the opening / closing time of the grand prize opening 8, and the like. Further, the time control process for updating the auxiliary game timer counter, which performs the update process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of the normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the second start port 7, and the like, is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of a big hit determination random number, a special symbol determination random number, and a hit determination random number.

In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the hit determination initial value random number.

Regarding the update of various random numbers, the random numbers are updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for each type of random number. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1", and each random number value is newly added from the initial value random number at that time. Update to.

In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a newly valid signal has been transmitted from the predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20.

In step S300, the main CPU 101a includes the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol hold first display 63, and the second special symbol hold first display 64. In addition, the special symbol special electric control process (special symbol system process) for controlling the large winning opening control device 80 (control of the special symbol system device) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 to 30.

In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol first display 62, the normal symbol hold first display 65, and the second start port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Performs control processing (ordinary symbol processing).

In this Fuzu Fuden control processing (ordinary symbol system processing), the main CPU 101a loads the value of the Fuzu Fuden processing data, refers to the branch address from the loaded Fuzu Fuden processing data, and refers to the Fuzu Fuden processing data. If the processing data = 0, it is a normal symbol determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general map determination information acquired based on the winning of the winning gates 9 and 10. If the normal symbol storage determination processing including the above is performed and the normal symbol processing data = 1, the normal symbol variation processing when the normal symbol first display 62 is fluctuating is performed based on the normal symbol determination. If the normal symbol processing data = 2, the normal symbol stop processing is performed when the normal symbol first display 62 is stopped, and if the normal symbol processing data = 3, the second start port 7 is pressed. Auxiliary game processing for opening / closing control (operation of the second start port control device 70) is performed.

In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the prize ball counters corresponding to the starting ports (first starting port 6, second starting port 7), the large winning opening 8 and the general winning opening 11 exceed "0". If it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

In step S600, the main CPU 101a includes external signal output control data for outputting information about the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid. Drive control data for driving 80B (starting port opening / closing solenoid drive data and winning opening opening / closing solenoid drive data), first special symbol 1st display 60, 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, and 1st Display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, ordinary symbol) for displaying a predetermined symbol on the special symbol hold 1st display 63 and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64. Hold display data) data creation process.

In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs an output control process. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to light each LED of the first special symbol 1st display 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63, and the 2nd special symbol hold 2nd display 64. In addition, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. Finally, a command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input the detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the process shifts to step S220. When the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the general winning opening winning ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it.

In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 8. If the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process shifts to step S230. When the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds and updates predetermined data to the large winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball, and wins the large winning opening 8 at the same time. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls played is added and updated.

In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a are input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process is terminated, and if there is a valid detection signal, the start port prize ball counter is updated by adding "1" in step S232, and the first start port entry ball of the main RAM 101c is added. Turn on the first start opening winning flag in the flag storage area.

In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter that counts the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the process is terminated, and if it is determined that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold is performed in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is added by "1" and updated. Further, in step S234, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in order to update the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold first display 63. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S235, the main CPU 101a first specially provides special determination information consisting of each random number value indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter. Stores in the symbol hold storage area.

The first special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in the storage unit in which the random numbers are not stored. It is stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

In step S236, the main CPU 101a makes a first pre-determination based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6. Here, the first pre-determination will be described.

Specifically, in the first pre-determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, The first special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure variation pattern as the first preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (S313).

Then, in step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start port winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. ..

Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S242.

In step S242, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the start port prize ball counter to update, adds "1" to the second start port entry regulation counter, and updates, and also adds "1" to the second start port of the main RAM 101c. The second start port entry flag is turned on in the winning flag storage area. The second starting port entry regulation counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting port 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for one auxiliary game is limited.

In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter that counts the second special symbol hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the process ends, and if it determines that the second special figure hold number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (U2) of the second special figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S244, the main CPU 101a displays special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in order to update the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold first display 64. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

In step S245, the main CPU 101a secondly specializes the special determination information consisting of the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter. Stores in the symbol hold storage area.

The second special symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in the storage unit in which the random numbers are not stored. It is stored in order from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

Then, the main CPU 101a makes a second pre-determination based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second pre-determination will be described.

Specifically, in the second pre-determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. The second special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure variation pattern as the second preliminary determination before performing the special figure variation pattern determination process (step S313).

Then, in step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation pattern determined in the second preliminary determination in the production transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. ..

Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a whether or not there is a valid detection signal. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S252.

In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol hold number counter for counting the normal symbol hold number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the process ends, and if it determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S253.

In step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value (G) of the normal figure hold number counter by adding "1". Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a determines the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c in order to update the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold first display 65. Set in the area.

In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores each random number indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number counter in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. To finish.

The normal symbol reservation storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a smaller number than the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored. It is memorized in order from. Each storage unit is divided into areas for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. The value of the special figure special electric processing data is loaded in step S301, the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol storage determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, the processing is transferred to the special symbol variation processing (step S320), and if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the big hit game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is transferred to the small hit game processing (step S350), and the special figure special electric processing If the data = 5, the process is moved to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30.

Next, the special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101a ends the process, and if it determines that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move the process.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter and updates it, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is stored. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is erased. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special figures (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-5.

The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol hold number counter by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and shifts the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area in step S310-6. I do.

For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. Further, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Will be done. As a result, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random number value used in the previous game are deleted. Further, the stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

In addition, in order to update the first special figure hold number (U1) or the second special figure hold number (U2) in accordance with the data shift process (digestion process of the hold) in step S310-6, specifically. Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol holding storage area is shifted with priority over the first special symbol holding storage area, but the game ball is set to the starting port. The first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area may be shifted in the order in which the balls are entered, or the first special symbol holding storage area may be shifted in preference to the second special symbol holding storage area. You may let me.

If it is determined in step S310-4 that the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) is not 1 or more, the process is transferred to the customer waiting state setting process of steps S319-1 to S319-3. The main CPU 101a first determines in step S319-1 whether or not the demo determination flag "01H" is set in the demo determination flag storage area. When the demo judgment flag "01H" is set in the demo judgment flag storage area, the special symbol storage judgment process is terminated, and when the demo judgment flag "01H" is not set in the demo judgment flag storage area, the special symbol storage judgment process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S319-2.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets the demo designation command in the production transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process.

In step S311 the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted and newly stored in the 0th storage unit in step S310-6.

Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 23. First, the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 6.

If it is determined in step S311-1 of the main CPU 101a that it is the first starting port 6, the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S311-1 of the main CPU 101a that it is not the first start port 6 (it is the second start port 7), the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol is selected in step S311-3.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is in a high-probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, further "from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3" Select the "first high-probability jackpot determination table" or the "second high-probability jackpot determination table".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the "first low probability" is further increased from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. Select "Big hit decision table" or "Second low probability jackpot decision table".

In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit in step S310-6, and selects the "high probability jackpot" selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. By collating with the "decision table" or the "low-probability jackpot determination table", it is determined whether the jackpot is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

When the jackpot determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a “big hit”. If it is determined to be a "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a big hit in step S312-3, and if it is not determined to be a "big hit", step S312-2. Move the process to 2.

In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a "small hit". Here, if it is determined to be a "small hit", the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4, and if it is not determined to be a "small hit", the process shifts to step S312-5.

In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. By collating the random value for special symbol determination in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in S310-6, with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5 (a)), the jackpot special symbol is obtained. Make a special symbol judgment to be decided.

In step S312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit special symbol is determined by collating the random value for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning the small hit (FIG. 5 (b)). Make a judgment.

In step S312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol for loss is determined by collating the random value for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit, which is shifted in S310-6, with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5 (b)). Make a special symbol judgment.

Then, in step S312-6, the special effect symbol designation command is determined based on the results of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designation command is produced. Set in the transmission data storage area.

Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a has stopped symbol data related to the special symbol based on the results of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5 (hereinafter, "special symbol stop"). (Referred to as "symbol data"), that is, the type of special symbol is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

The determined special symbol stop symbol data is used as a "big hit special symbol" or "small hit" in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 27 when the special symbol variation pattern is determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of FIG. 25, as will be described later. It is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 28 or the small hit game process of FIG. 29 when determining "special symbol" or the like.

In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a collates the special symbol stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area and selects a game condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the game condition data is determined by collating the special figure stop symbol data with the selected game condition data determination table, and stored in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22 and performs the special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, the time required to display the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol fluctuation time) based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination (hereinafter referred to as the special symbol variation time) and A special figure fluctuation pattern including information on the production type of the fluctuation effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON or OFF of the high probability flag and the ON or OFF of the time saving flag in the game condition determination table of FIG. 8B, and refers to the current game state (high probability). Check the gaming state or low-probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state or non-time-saving gaming state).

In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S313-3, except for the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. If it is in the gaming state, the process is moved to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of fluctuations of the variation display of the special symbol to be started from now on (1 to 30 times, 31 to 74 times, 75 times to 84 times). Check the times).

In step S313-4, when the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special symbol variation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of the variation display of the special symbol confirmed in step S313-3.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

When the special symbol stop symbol data is "18H" or "28H", that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing", the main CPU 101a further determines the special symbol variation pattern. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, collates it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), and collates it with the special figure of "no reach loss". Determine whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of "loss with reach".

In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern, and obtains the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is transmitted for the production of the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 recognizes that the variation display of the special symbol starts by receiving this command, and finally specifies the special figure variation pattern. The variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined based on the command.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the game condition at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and sets the game state designation command reflecting the state in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 101c. ..

Then, in step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure fluctuation time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets the special symbol variation display data in order to display the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of the variation display, and the variation time.

The main CPU 101a sets the flag "00H" in the demo determination flag storage area in step S310-11, that is, clears the demo determination flag storage area, and sets the special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter =). 0?) Is determined. As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not completed, the special symbol variation process is terminated and the next subroutine is executed.

When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol ends, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a issues a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol ends. Set in the transmission data storage area.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a is set in step S312-13 to stop and display the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61. Set the special figure stop display data based on the stop symbol data. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special symbol stop time”, for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special electric processing data.

In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first start opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, whether or not the special symbol stop time set in the special game timer counter has elapsed in step S320-4 ( Special game timer counter = 0?) Is determined. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the special symbol does not end, the special symbol stop process ends, and when it determines that the stop display of the special symbol ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Move the process.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area means that the time saving game state is currently in effect. When the flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, the process is moved to step S330-3, and when the flag is turned off in the time saving flag storage area, the processing is moved to step S330-6.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a is set to "1" from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the time-saving game state, which indicates the remaining number of times of the variation display of the special symbol due to the time-saving game state (J: hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of time-saving game states"). The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state.

In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving game states (J) = 0. If the time-saving game state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-5, and if the time-saving game state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-6.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time saving flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (J) in the time-saving game state becomes "0" means that the variation display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Ja) that the special symbol can be changed in the time-saving game state, and the variation display of the special symbol due to the "time reduction" state Means that is finished.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the game is currently in a high-probability gaming state. If the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-7, and if the flag is turned off in the high-probability flag storage area, the process is transferred to step S330-10.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of a high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “high-probability gaming state remaining number”). The calculated value (X-1) obtained by subtracting "1" from is stored as a new high-probability gaming state remaining number of times (X).

In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0. If the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-9, and if the number of remaining high-probability gaming states (X) = 0, the process is transferred to step S330-10.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the remaining number of times (X) in the high-probability gaming state becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol is performed the number of times (Xa) that the variation display of the special symbol can be executed in the high-probability gaming state, and the special symbol in the "high probability" state It means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets the game state designation command indicating the game state in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop processing is "big hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10-12, 20-21). To do. Here, if it is determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-14, and if it is not determined to be a jackpot special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-12.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is "small hit". Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is related to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, if it is determined to be a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-17, and if it is not determined to be a small hit special symbol, the process is transferred to step S330-13.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), the remaining fluctuation number counter of the high probability gaming state, and the remaining fluctuation number counter of the time saving game state. To do.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets the opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. 28.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The opening here means the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (the first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to S340-6.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-3. ..

In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, it is confirmed which big hit is according to the special figure stop symbol data, the big winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of big hit is selected, and the big winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing control table for long hit games or the large winning opening opening / closing control table for short hit games is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c according to the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores it. Since the round game has not been executed even once at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the round game number storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the value (special electric operation number (K)) stored in the special electric operation number storage area and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a sets the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B to open the large winning opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special electric operation number (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 8 ( The operating time of the large winning opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1, and if K = 1, a round designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area. This is to transmit the information that the round game is started to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first opening of the first round game of the long hit game, "1" is set in the round game number storage area and "1" is set in the special electric operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating a one-round game is set in the transmission data storage area for production. On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the special electric operation number storage area, the jackpot game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the production transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits the round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, the image display device 14 displays the effect such as "ROUND1".

In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the end of all the preset round games (the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is finished) to the end of the big hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the ending is currently in progress, the process is moved to step S340-17, and it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is determined. Move the process to.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the large winning opening control device 80 is operating. When the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is being opened, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-8 whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). ) Is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the process is moved to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, in order to close the large winning opening 8, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c, and the large winning opening opening / closing determined in step S340-3 is performed. With reference to the control table, the closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current round number (R) and special electric operation number (K). As a result, the grand prize opening 8 will be closed.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has been completed. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, nine). ) Is reached, so it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process is moved to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

If it is determined in step S340-7 that the large winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not the preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S340-4.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electric operation number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When the main CPU 101a determines "Yes", the process is transferred to step S340-15, and when the main CPU 101a determines "No", the process is transferred to step S340-14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores it.

In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game end process. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game count storage area is reset.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, the type of jackpot is confirmed according to the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the ending time according to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it determines that the ending time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S340-18, and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game is not performed, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 in the special figure special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the jackpot game end processing shown in FIG.

Next, the small hit game process will be described with reference to FIG. 29. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to S350-5.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S350-3.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a large winning opening opening / closing control table according to the type of small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the large winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening opening process. In the large winning opening opening process, first, "1" is added to the value (special electric operation number (K)) stored in the special electric operation number storage area and stored. Then, in order to open the large winning opening 8 is set, the energization start data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set, and the current special electric operation is performed with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3. The opening time of the large winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. The ending here means the period from the end of the opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, if the main CPU 101a determines that the ending is currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-13, and if it is determined that the ending is not currently in progress, the process is transferred to step S350-6.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the large winning opening 8 is open. When the main CPU 101a determines that the large winning opening 8 is not open, the process shifts to step S350-10, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. , It is determined whether or not the "opening end condition" for ending the opening of the large winning opening 8 is satisfied. As this "opening end condition", the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached the specified number (for example, 9), or one opening time of the large winning opening 8 has elapsed (special game timer counter). = 0) is adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a large winning opening closing process. In the large winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to close the large winning opening 8, and the large winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3 is referred to. , The closing time of the large winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter based on the current special electric operation number (K). As a result, the grand prize opening 8 will be closed.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game end condition is satisfied. The small hit game end condition is that the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times the large winning opening 8 is opened in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is set to a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the process shifts to step S350-11, and when it is determined that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the small hit game process is performed. To finish.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets "0" in the special electric operation number storage area and sets "0" in the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game end process. That is, the special electric operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hit in the transmission data storage area for production based on the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the ending time according to the type of small hit. Is set in the special game timer counter.

In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. The closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, like the opening time. As a result, if it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and if it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-4. ..

In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed, and if it determines that the ending time has elapsed, the process shifts to step S350-14 and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game has not been performed, the small hit game process is terminated.

In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads the game condition data.

In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high-probability flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S360-4, and if it is determined that the high-probability flag is turned on, the high-probability flag is stored in the high-probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-3. (01H) is turned ON, and the number of times the game can be executed (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the high-probability game state remaining number counter.

In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded game condition data with the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the time reduction flag in the time reduction flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process shifts to step S360-6, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the time saving flag (01H) is set in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time as turning it on, the number of times that the game can be executed (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving game state remaining number counter.

In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, sets a game state designation command indicating the state of the current game condition in the transmission data storage area for production, and in step S360-7, the special feature is set. 0 is set in the special electric processing data in FIG. 22, and the processing is transferred to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, the process executed by the sub CPU 102a on the effect control board 102 will be described.

First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of updating the effect random number used to control the effect including the special effect determination random number, the variation effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers constituting the effect random number. In the production random number update process, a random number counter provided for each type of random number is added by "1". A random number range is provided for each type of random number that constitutes the production random number. The random number range is from "0" to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, in updating the random number, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without being added by "1".

Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set so as to differ depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the production random numbers from being completely synchronized, instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, the various production random numbers are provided with different initial value random numbers. When updating random numbers, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random number value may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by the production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed by generating clock pulses at predetermined cycles (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a into the stack area.

In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs a time control process for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The details of this command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 on the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process on the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. After that, a process of analyzing the command received in this step S1300 is performed.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect input control process. The details of this effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs a data output process of transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by the production control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives the command and determines whether or not the command is stored in the receive buffer. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process, and when it determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a demo designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303, and determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1304.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demo effect standby flag in the demo effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a pre-process for executing the demo effect, and the time until the demo effect is started (demo effect standby). Time) is set in the demo effect timer counter, and the command analysis process ends.

In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the start opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1305, and determines that the command is not the starting opening winning designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1306.

In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs a start opening winning designation command storage process. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in the effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the start opening winning designation command storage process.

The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start port (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start port winning designation command, confirms the type of starting port (first starting port 6 or second starting port 7) related to the starting port winning designation command, and confirms the type of starting port. It is stored in the production information storage area according to the above.

Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of start ports 6 and 7. The start opening prize designation command is stored in order from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the start opening prize designation command is not stored.

In addition, each storage unit stores the production data of the effect performed based on the start port prize designation command unit that stores the start port prize designation command and the start port prize designation command stored in the start port prize designation command unit. It is equipped with a production data storage unit.

In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the game state specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1307, and determines that there is no game state designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1308.

In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the game state indicated by the received game state designation command in the game state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1309, and determines that there is no special effect symbol designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310.

In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a constitutes the special symbol lottery effect, is performed when the stop display of the special symbol is being performed, and is for performing the stop display of the special effect symbol suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery. The special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. In the special effect symbol pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect symbol designation command and stops and displays it in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the information contained in the received special effect symbol designation command. The pattern, that is, the arrangement (combination) of the decorative symbols arranged on the predetermined effective line in the stop display of the special effect symbol is determined.

In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is the special figure variation pattern specification command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311, and determines that there is no special figure variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1312. ..

In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a constitutes the special symbol lottery effect, is performed when the special symbol lottery is displayed, and the variable effect suggests the result of the special symbol lottery (variable display of the special effect symbol). The variation effect pattern determination process for determining the variation effect pattern (including) is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special effect symbol stop designation command, the process shifts to step S1313 and step S1314, and when it determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1315. Move the process.

In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect is terminated by receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, end the variation effect, and display the stop display of the special effect symbol. .. The end time of this effect is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset effect event during the variable effect.

Further, in S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the effect data stored in the sub RAM 102c, which will be described later.

In step S1314, the sub CPU 102a performs the effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode when the end of the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a classification mode (category) of the variation effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to the special symbol lottery (or the variation display of the special symbol). , Associated with the state of the game conditions, etc.

In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to the special game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1316, and determines that there is no special game opening designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1317.

In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern, which is an aspect of the special game effect, which is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1318, and determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1319.

In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern, which is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines the round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets the round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1320, and when determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determining process for determining an ending effect pattern, which is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

Here, the variation effect pattern determination table used in the variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 35) described later will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a switches to the special figure variation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current gaming state. The process of determining the variation effect pattern is performed from the associated variation effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a variable effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b and associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which will be described later.
FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode B set in the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. Shown.
FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode C set in the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. Shown.
FIG. 43 shows a variation effect pattern determination table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which is associated with the effect mode D set in the special figure variation number of 75 to 84 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which will be described later. Shown.

In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 40 to 43, a special symbol determination result (judgment result of jackpot determination), a special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, and a variation corresponding to the special figure variation time are displayed. Based on the effect time (s) of the effect, the variation effect pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the variation effect pattern, the variation effect pattern determined according to the variation effect pattern determination value, and the variation effect pattern. The effect content of the variation effect and the execution / non-execution (execution (◯), non-execution (x)) of each special effect in the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern are stored in association with each other.

(Variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
The variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state of FIG. 40 gives the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won. As a variation effect pattern in which the expectation of winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is different, a variation effect pattern in which super reach is executed after execution of normal reach and a variation effect pattern in which special reach is executed after execution of normal reach are executed. And, it has a variable effect that executes super reach after executing normal reach and then executes special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not to win the third big hit or small hit, a variable effect pattern in which the story reach is executed after the execution of the normal reach and a variable effect pattern in which the challenge reach is executed after the execution of the normal reach. And have.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A of FIG. 40, when "E6H00H" or "E7H00H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost. Is determined to be any of "variable effect pattern A001" to "variable effect pattern A003".

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern A001" to "variation effect pattern A003" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner in a short variation effect time of 4 seconds ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-". 3 ”), it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

Further, when "E6H01H" or "E7H01H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, among "variation effect pattern A004" to "variation effect pattern A006". Either is decided.

In the variation effect of "variation effect pattern A004" to "variation effect pattern A006", a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed in the variation effect time of 8 seconds ("symbol variation A2-1" to "symbol variation A2-3". ”), It is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

Further, when "E6H02H" or "E7H02H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, among "variation effect pattern A007" to "variation effect pattern A009". Either is decided.

The variable effect of "variable effect pattern A007" to "variable effect pattern A009" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner in a variable effect time of 12 seconds ("symbol variation A3-1" to "symbol variation A3-3"). ), It is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H03H" or "E7H03H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of "variation effect pattern A010" to "variation effect pattern A012" Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A010" to "variable effect pattern A012", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-3"), and the special effect symbol 2 A variation that performs normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-3") that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. It is a production.

If "E6H07H" or "E7H07H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of "variation effect pattern A022" to "variation effect pattern A025". Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A022" to "variable effect pattern A025", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Perform normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then perform super reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4"), which has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach. It is a variable effect that performs "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H08H" or "E7H08H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of "variation effect pattern A026" to "variation effect pattern A029" Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A026" to "variable effect pattern A029", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Performs normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach and super reach. This is a variable effect that performs a special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

If "E6H09H" or "E7H09H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of "variation effect pattern A030" to "variation effect pattern A033". Is determined.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A030" to "variable effect pattern A033", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Perform normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then perform super reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4"), which has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach. After performing "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4"), Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") has a higher expectation for big hits than Super Reach. This is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

When "E6H0AH" or "E7H0AH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, among "variation effect pattern A034" to "variation effect pattern A037" Either is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A034" to "variable effect pattern A037", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Perform normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then perform super reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4"), which has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach. It is a variable effect that performs "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, among "variation effect pattern A038" to "variation effect pattern A041" Either is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A038" to "variable effect pattern A041", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Performs normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then has higher expectations for big hits than normal reach and super reach. This is a variable effect that performs a special reach (“Special Reach A1-1” to “Special Reach A1-4”) and notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When "E6H0CH" or "E7H0CH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, among "variation effect pattern A042" to "variation effect pattern A045" Either is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A042" to "variable effect pattern A045", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-4"), and the special effect symbol 2 Perform normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4") to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then perform super reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-4"), which has a higher expectation for big hits than normal reach. After performing "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4"), Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") has a higher expectation for big hits than Super Reach. Is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical values of the special effect symbols that are stopped and displayed are different.

When "E6H10H" or "E7H10H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, it is among "variation effect pattern A058" to "variation effect pattern A060". Either is decided.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A058" to "variable effect pattern A060", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation A1-1" to "symbol variation A1-3"), and the special effect symbol 2 Perform normal reach ("normal reach A1-1" to "normal reach A1-3") to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and then, as described above, the characters that appear in challenge reach as well. A story reach consisting of a story that suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small hit by going on a journey to find the pet dog that disappeared and finally finding the pet dog ("Story Reach A1-1" "-" Story Reach A1-3 "), and it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

As described above, the variable effect of "variable effect pattern A061" to "variable effect pattern A063" challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the sword of the target item from multiple treasure chests as described above. However, the challenge reach ("Challenge Reach A1-1" to "Challenge Reach A1-3") suggests that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small hit when the character acquires the item. Is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the small hit.

In the variable production of "variable effect pattern A064" to "variable effect pattern A066", after "design variation 3", the character challenges the treasure hunt game in which the character searches for the cloak of the target item from multiple treasure chests, and the character acquires it. A challenge reach (“Challenge Reach A2-1” to “Challenge Reach A2-3”) is performed to suggest that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the small hit depending on the item to be played, and the jackpot judgment is made. This is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result is the third big hit or small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, "variable effect pattern A001" to "variable effect pattern A075" have "line notice A", "character notice A", "development notice A", and "decision" as special effects. Information indicating the execution (○) and non-execution (×) of “Direction A” is associated with it.

Here, as will be described later, the “line notice” is a big hit game by displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image in which a character described later speaks any of a plurality of lines having different expectations for the big hit. It is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing the above and gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of the big hit is a big hit. In the effect mode A, as described later, any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" of "line notice A" is executed as "line notice".

Further, as will be described later, the "character notice" notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying an image of any of a plurality of characters having different expectations for the jackpot on the image display device 14. It is a notice production that gives a feeling of expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot. In the production mode A, as described later, any one of "character notice A1" to "character notice A5" of "character notice A" is executed as "character notice".

Further, as will be described later, the "development notice" depends on the state of the effect button 18A (non-protruding state or protruding state), or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. , Notifies the possibility of developing from the current production to the next production with a high expectation for the jackpot, and also informs the possibility of executing the jackpot game, and expects that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. It is a notice production to give. In the production mode A, as described later, "development notice A1" or "development notice A2" of "development notice A" is executed as "development notice".

Further, the "decision effect" is an effect of notifying the determination of the winning of the jackpot, as will be described later, and when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of loss, the first decorative member 17A is not operated. In the effect mode A, as described later, the "determined effect A1" or the "determined effect A2" of the "determined effect A" is executed as the "determined effect".

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is "variable effect pattern A034", "line notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" are executed (○), and "decision effect". Information to the effect of non-execution (x) of "A" is associated.
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern A034" in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1311-6, "line notice A" and "character notice A" are used as special effects. , Confirm that "Development Notice A" will be executed.

The variable production performed in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, which makes it easier to win a big hit than in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, is a simple production that does not overheat in the advance notice production.
In addition, the maximum 84 variation effects performed in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are the effect mode B performed with the special figure variation number of 1 to 30 times and the special figure variation number of 31 times to prevent redundancy. The effect mode C, which is performed 74 times, and the effect mode D, which is performed when the number of special figure fluctuations is 75 to 84 times, are different.

(Variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 41 is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the above-mentioned low-probability gaming state and non-time-saving gaming state. This is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed when the number of fluctuations of the special figure is 1 to 30 times.

In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a feeling of expectation that it will be easy to win a big hit. Therefore, in the production mode B, in order to give the player a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be won in an early period when the number of special figure fluctuations is small, the fluctuation of the production mode A is changed from 1 to 30 times. The content of the production is simpler than the production.

In the effect mode B, if the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the special figure fluctuation time is higher than that in the effect mode A so that the variation effect of the next special figure change number is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a high proportion of variable effect patterns of variable effect of 2 seconds. Further, when the character develops into reach after the change of the special effect symbol, only the "special character reach" in which the characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other is executed.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 41, when "E6H30H" or "E7H30H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost. "Variable effect pattern B001" or "Variable effect pattern B002" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern B001" and "variation effect pattern B002" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner in a short variation effect time of 2 seconds ("symbol variation B1-1", "symbol variation B1-". 2 ”), it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H31H" or "E7H31H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B003" or "variation effect pattern B004" is determined. To. Further, when "E6H32H" or "E7H32H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B005" or "variation effect pattern B006" is determined. To.

The variable effect of "variable effect pattern B003" to "variable effect pattern B006" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner ("symbol variation B2-1", "symbol variation B2-2", "symbol variation B3-1". , "Symbol variation B3-2"), it is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H33H" or "E7H33H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern B007" or "variation effect pattern B008" is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H34H" or "E7H34H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B009" or "variation effect pattern B010" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H35H" or "E6H35H". When "E7H35H" is determined, "variation effect pattern B011" or "variation effect pattern B012" is determined, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined, "variation effect pattern" is determined. When the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H37H" or "E7H37H" is determined for "B013" or "variation effect pattern B014", the "variation effect pattern B015" or "variation effect pattern B016" is changed to the special figure variation. When the pattern designation command "E6H38H" or "E7H38H" is determined, the "variable effect pattern B017" or the "variable effect pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern B007" to "variation effect pattern B018" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner ("symbol variation B3-1", "symbol variation B3-2", "symbol variation B2-1". , "Design fluctuation B2-2"), and then a special character reach ("Special character reach B4-1", "Special character reach B4-2", "Special character reach B5-1", "Special character reach B5-1" "Special Character Reach B5-2", "Special Character Reach B6-1", "Special Character Reach B6-2", "Special Character Reach B1-1", "Special Character Reach B1-2", "Special Character Reach B2-" 1 ”,“ Special character reach B2-2 ”,“ Special character reach B3-1 ”,“ Special character reach B3-2 ”) is performed, and it is a variable production that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss. ..

When "E6H39H" or "E7H39H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, "variation effect pattern B019" or "variation effect pattern B020" is determined. To. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H3AH" or "E7H3AH" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B021" or "variation effect pattern B022" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H3BH" or "E7H3BH". When "" is determined, "variable effect pattern B023" or "variable effect pattern B024" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B019" to "variable effect pattern B024", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation B3-1", "symbol variation B3-2"), and then a special character is displayed. Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B1-1", "Special character reach B1-2", "Special character reach B2-1", "Special character reach B2-2", "Special character reach B3-1" , "Special character reach B3-2"), and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical values of the special effect symbols that are stopped and displayed are different.

When "E6H3FH" or "E7H3FH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern B031" or "variation effect pattern B032" is determined. To. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H40H" or "E7H40H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern B033" or "variation effect pattern B034" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H41H" or "E7H41H". Is determined, "variable effect pattern B035" or "variable effect pattern B036" is determined, respectively.

In the variable effect of "variable effect pattern B031" to "variable effect pattern B036", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation B2-1", "symbol variation B2-2"), and then a special character is displayed. Appearing special character reach ("Special character reach B4-1", "Special character reach B4-2", "Special character reach B5-1", "Special character reach B5-2", "Special character reach B6-1" , "Special character reach B6-2"), and it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, in the "variable effect pattern B001" to "variable effect pattern B042", "development notice B" and "decision effect B" are executed (○) and non-executed (○) as special effects. Information to the effect of (x) is associated.

For example, the special symbol determination result "variation effect pattern B019" is associated with information indicating that "development notice B" is executed (◯) and "decision effect B" is not executed (x).
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variation effect pattern B019" in step S1311-4 of the variation effect pattern determination process described later, it confirms that the "development notice B" is executed as a special effect in step S1311-6. To do.

(Variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42 is a variation effect of the variation effect performed after the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is 31 to 74 times. It is a pattern.

In this effect mode C, there is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect that is executed when the jackpot is not won even in the special figure variation number 1 to 30 times in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the production mode C as a variation production pattern having a reach effect different from the "special character reach" of the production mode B in the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. Has a variable production pattern of "attack reach" in which the character attacks.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42, when "E6H50H" or "E7H50H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost. "Variable effect pattern C001" or "Variable effect pattern C002" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern C001" and "variation effect pattern C002" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner in a short variation effect time of 2 seconds ("symbol variation C1-1", "symbol variation C1-". 2 ”), it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

Further, when the special symbol determination result is lost and "E6H51H" or "E7H51H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, "variation effect pattern C003" or "variation effect pattern C004" is determined. To. Further, when "E6H52H" or "E7H52H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern C005" or "variation effect pattern C006" is determined. To.

In the variation effect of "variation effect pattern C003" to "variation effect pattern C006", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation C2-1", "symbol variation C2-2", "symbol variation C3-1". , "Symbol variation C3-2"), it is a variation effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

If "E6H53H" or "E7H53H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, "variation effect pattern C007" or "variation effect pattern C008" is determined. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H54H" or "E7H54H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C009" or "variation effect pattern C010" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H55H" or "E6H55H". When "E7H55H" is determined, "variation effect pattern C011" or "variation effect pattern C012" is determined, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H56H" or "E7H56H" is determined, "variation effect pattern" is determined. When the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command "E6H57H" or "E7H57H" is determined for "C013" or "variation effect pattern C014", the "variation effect pattern C015" or "variation effect pattern C016" is changed to the special figure variation. When the pattern designation command "E6H58H" or "E7H58H" is determined, the "variable effect pattern C017" or the "variable effect pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

In the variation effect of "variation effect pattern C007" to "variation effect pattern C018", a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner ("symbol variation C2-1", "symbol variation C2-2", "symbol variation C3-1". , "Design variation C3-2"), and then attack reach ("attack reach C4-1", "attack reach C4-2", "attack reach C5-1", which consists of an effect in which a predetermined character attacks. "Attack Reach C5-2", "Attack Reach C6-1", "Attack Reach C6-1", "Attack Reach C1-1", "Attack Reach C1-2", "Attack Reach C2-1", "Attack" "Reach C2-2", "Attack Reach C3-1", "Attack Reach C3-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

When "E6H59H" or "E7H59H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, "variation effect pattern C019" or "variation effect pattern C020" is determined. To. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H5AH" or "E7H5AH" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C021" or "variation effect pattern C022" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H5BH" or "E7H5BH". When "" is determined, "variable effect pattern C023" or "variable effect pattern C024" is determined, respectively.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern C019" to "variation effect pattern C024" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner ("symbol variation C3-1", "symbol variation C3-2"), and then a predetermined character. Attack Reach ("Attack Reach C1-1", "Attack Reach C1-2", "Attack Reach C2-1", "Attack Reach C2-2", "Attack Reach C3-1", "Attack reach C3-2") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical values of the special effect symbols that are stopped and displayed are different.

When "E6H5FH" or "E7H5FH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, "variation effect pattern C031" or "variation effect pattern C032" is determined. To. Similarly, when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H60H" or "E7H60H" is determined, the "variation effect pattern C033" or "variation effect pattern C034" is used as the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H61H" or "E7H61H". Is determined, "variable effect pattern C035" or "variable effect pattern C036" is determined, respectively.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern C031" to "variation effect pattern C036" displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner ("symbol variation C2-1", "symbol variation C2-2"), and then a predetermined character. Attack Reach ("Attack Reach C4-1", "Attack C4-2", "Attack Reach C5-1", "Attack Reach C5-2", "Attack Reach C6-1", "Attack Reach C6-1" Attack reach C6-2 ") is performed, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical values of the special effect symbols that are stopped and displayed are different.

In the variable effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, in the "variable effect pattern C001" to "variable effect pattern C042", "development notice C" and "decision effect C" are executed (〇) or not executed as special effects. Information to the effect of (x) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result "variable effect pattern C019" is associated with information to the effect that "development notice C" and "decision effect C" are executed (◯).
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern C019" in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1311-6, the "development notice C" and the "decision effect C" are special effects. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Variable effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. 43 is a variation effect of the variation effect performed after the number of special figure variations in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state is 75 to 84 times. It is a pattern.

In this effect mode D, there is a variation effect pattern of the variation effect that is executed when the jackpot is not won even in the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times in the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. Therefore, it appears only in the effect mode D as a variation effect pattern having a reach effect different from the "attack reach" of the effect mode C in the special figure variation number of 31 to 74 times in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. The character performing rock-paper-scissors has a variable production pattern of "rock-paper-scissors production" in which a character who is an opponent of rock-paper-scissors and a character performing rock-paper-scissors a predetermined number of times. By such a variation effect of the rock-paper-scissors effect, the player is expected to win the jackpot in a state where the number of changes in the special figure in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state is small.

As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D of FIG. 43, when "E6H70H" or "E7H70H" is determined as the special figure variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost. When any one of "variable effect pattern D001" to "variable effect pattern D003" is determined and "E6H71H" or "E7H71H" is determined, "variable effect pattern D004" to "variable effect" When any one of "Pattern D006" is determined and "E6H72H" or "E7H72H" is determined, any one of "Variable effect pattern D007" to "Variable effect pattern D009" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D001" to "variation effect pattern D009" is "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D1-1" to "symbol variation D1-3", "design" that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. During the fluctuation D2-1 "to" symbol fluctuation D2-3 "," symbol fluctuation D3-1 "to" symbol fluctuation D3-3 "), two characters are notified by notifying" Let's win once! " (Friend's character, opponent's character) performs one junken, and the effect is that the ally's character loses, and it is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

If "E6H73H" or "E7H73H" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern specification command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of "variation effect pattern D010" to "variation effect pattern D012". Is determined, and when the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H74H" or "E7H74H" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern D013" to "variation effect pattern D015" is determined, and the special figure variation When the pattern designation command "E6H75H" or "E7H75H" is determined, any one of "variable effect pattern D016" to "variable effect pattern D018" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D010" to "variation effect pattern D018" is a variation effect that executes "rock-paper-scissors reach" after "symbol variation" and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D010" to "variation effect pattern D012" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D1-1" to "symbol variation D1-3") in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. , "Let's win rock-paper-scissors twice !!", two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the teammate character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" to "Rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3") The effect is that the character of the ally loses in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, and the change that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss It is a production.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D013" to "variation effect pattern D015" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D2-1" to "symbol variation D2-3") in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. , "Let's win 3 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Janken Reach D2-1"-"Janken Reach D2-3"), the character of the ally wins in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, and the character of the ally loses in the third round of rock-paper-scissors. This is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of is a loss.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D016" to "variation effect pattern D018" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D3-1" to "symbol variation D3-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win 4 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Janken Reach D3-1"-"Janken Reach D3-3"), the content is that the ally character wins in the second and third rounds of rock-paper-scissors, and the ally character loses in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors. , It is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a loss.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D019" to "variation effect pattern D021" is performed in "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D1-1" to "symbol variation D1-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win rock-paper-scissors twice !!", two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the teammate character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" to "Rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3") Even in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, a change that informs that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot by producing the content that the ally character wins. It is a production.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D022" to "variation effect pattern D024" is performed in "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D2-1" to "symbol variation D2-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win 3 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Janken Reach D2-1"-"Janken Reach D2-3"), the second and third rounds of rock-paper-scissors will be directed to win consecutively, and the result of the jackpot judgment will be a jackpot. It is a variable production that notifies that there is.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D025" to "variation effect pattern D027" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D3-1" to "symbol variation D3-3") in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. , "Let's win 4 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1" to "Rock-paper-scissors reach D3-3") The second to fourth rounds of rock-paper-scissors are directed to win consecutively, and the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot. It is a variable production that informs that it is.

When the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot is executed except that the numerical values of the special effect symbols that are stopped and displayed are different.

When "E6H7CH" or "E7H7CH" is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit, it is among "variation effect pattern D037" to "variation effect pattern D039". When any one is determined and the special figure variation pattern designation command "E6H7DH" or "E7H7DH" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern D040" to "variation effect pattern D042" is determined, and the special figure is determined. When the variation pattern designation command "E6H7EH" or "E7H7EH" is determined, any one of "variation effect pattern D043" to "variation effect pattern D045" is determined.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D037" to "variation effect pattern D039" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D1-1" to "symbol variation D1-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win rock-paper-scissors twice !!", two characters (friend character, opponent character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the teammate character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( In the second round of rock-paper-scissors in "Janken Reach D1-1" to "Janken Reach D1-3"), the character of the ally and the character of the opponent become "Aiko", and the jackpot judgment is judged. It is a variable effect that notifies that the result is the third big hit or small hit.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D040" to "variation effect pattern D042" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D2-1" to "symbol variation D2-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win 3 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Janken Reach D2-1"-"Janken Reach D2-3"), the ally character wins in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, and in the third round of rock-paper-scissors, the ally character and the opponent character become "Aiko". It is a variable effect that notifies that the judgment result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

The variation effect of "variation effect pattern D043" to "variation effect pattern D045" is performed during "symbol variation" ("symbol variation D3-1" to "symbol variation D3-3") that displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner. , "Let's win 4 times of rock-paper-scissors !!", two characters (friendly character, opponent's character) perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, and the friendly character wins, and then "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "Rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1" to "Rock-paper-scissors reach D3-3"), the ally character wins consecutively in the second and third rounds of rock-paper-scissors, and the ally character and opponent character in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors. It is a variable effect that gives an effect that "and" becomes "Aiko" and notifies that the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit.

When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed.

Information to the effect that "development notice D", "character notice D", and "decision effect D" are executed (○) is associated with "variation effect pattern D001" to "variation effect pattern D504" as special effects. There is.
For example, the special symbol determination result "variation effect pattern D019" is associated with information to the effect that the "development notice D" is executed (◯) and the “decision effect D” is executed (◯).
When the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern D019" in step S1311-4 of the variable effect pattern determination process described later, in step S1311-6, "development notice D" and "character notice D" are used as special effects. , Confirm that "decision effect D" is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 42 to 43, in the specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is executed from 1 to 30 times in the effect mode B. The execution rate of the special effect is higher in the variable effect of the effect mode C, which is executed when the number of variations is 31 to 74 times, than in the variable effect, and the number of variations is 35 to 84 times compared to the variable effect in the effect mode C. The variable effect of the effect mode D, which is executed at times, has a higher execution rate of the special effect.

(Type of each special production)
44 and 45 are tables that the sub CPU 102a refers to when determining the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the “effect mode A”. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 44B shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the execution ratios (%) of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" as "line notice A" are set, and are used as "character notice A". The execution rate (%) of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is set, and the execution rate (%) of "Development notice A1" to "Development notice A6" as "Development notice A" is set, and "Development notice A1" to "Development notice A6" are set. The execution ratios (%) of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" as "decision effect A" are set.

Further, FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode A. FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “line notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45B is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “character notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45C is a diagram showing a “development notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice A” in the effect mode A. FIG. 45D is a diagram showing a “decision effect A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “determination effect A” in the effect mode A.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 45 is executed in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "line notice A1" is to display the effect image of the "line a1", which is "It's a lot of money !!", on the image display device 14. In this "line notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X11 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image (character a1) described later saying "one thousand dollars!" As "line a1" ( (See (a-1-4)) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3” as a movable member. Perform the corresponding effect.

The "line notice A2" displays the effect image of the "line a2", which is "Are you getting 100 cars?", On the image display device 14. In this "line notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect button 18A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X11 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A remains in the non-protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect of "Character a1" described later saying "Hundred cars acquired?" As "Serif a1". A corresponding effect of the content such as displaying an image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 63) on the image display device 14 is executed.

The "line notice A3" is the same as the "line notice A2" except that the effect image of the "line a3", "Are you getting ten cars?", Is displayed on the image display device 14.

"Serif notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the production image of "Serif a4" on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, "Is one car acquired?", But "Serif notice A2" The content of the production is the same.

"Serif notice A5" does not set the operation validity period, and displays the effect image of "Serif a5" on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing, except that "Serif a5" is displayed on the image display device 14. The content of the production is the same.

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in "line notice A", the execution rate of "line notice A1" is the lowest in the case of loss, and "line notice A1" in the case of loss in the case of a big hit or the like. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" is highest in "line notice A1" and decreases as "line notice A2" to "line notice A5". , In "Speech notice A", the execution ratio of "Speech notice A1" to "Speech notice A5" is set.

The "line notice A" includes "line notice A1" for executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A and "line notice A2" to "line" for executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. It consists of "Notice A5". Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution rate of the "line notice A2" to "line notice A5" to be performed is higher than the execution rate of the "line notice A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "speech notice" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is the operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect of the effect mode A, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing the "character notice A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is high. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A.

The "character notice A1" displays the effect image of the "character a2-1" on the image display device 14. In this "character notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation validity period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation validity period (for example, the operation validity period Y11 described later). Not done. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "Character a2-1" described later (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device. The corresponding effect of the content such as displaying on 14 is executed.

The "character notice A2" displays the effect image of the "character a2-2" on the image display device 14. In this "character notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means in which the operation is valid during the operation validity period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation validity period (for example, the operation validity period Y11 described later). However, the state of the effect button 18A remains in the non-protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "Character a2-2" (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 63) described later is displayed. Corresponding effect of contents such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

The "character notice A3" is "character notice A3" except that the effect image of "character a2-3" (see (c-2-4) in FIG. 64) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of "character a2-2". The production content is the same as "Character notice A2".

The "character notice A4" does not set the operation validity period, and instead of the "character a2-2", the effect image of the "character notice a2-4" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying, the production content is the same as that of "Character notice A2".

The "character notice A5" does not set the operation validity period, and instead of the "character a2-2", the effect image of the "character notice a2-5" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 at a predetermined timing. Except for displaying, the production content is the same as that of "Character notice A2".

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in "character notice A", the execution rate of "character notice A1" is the lowest in the case of loss, and "character notice A1" in the case of loss in the case of a big hit or the like. Execution rate is the highest. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is highest in "Character notice A1" and decreases as "Character notice A2" to "Character notice A5". , The execution ratio of "Character notice A1" to "Character notice A5" is set.

The "character notice A" is based on the "character notice A1" that displays the effect image of the "character a2-1" on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A, and the operation of pressing the effect button 18A. It is composed of "character notice A2" to "character notice A5" that display the production images of "character a2-2" to "character a2-5" on the image display device 14. Then, when the ratio is higher than the jackpot or the like, the ratio of executing "Character notice A2" to "Character notice A5" in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A is the effect lever. It is higher than the rate at which "Character notice A1" in which a character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "character notice A" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A is the effect lever. It is higher than the ratio at which the effect of displaying the character image is executed based on the operation of 19A. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing "Character notice A1" in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and it is based on the operation of the effect button 18A. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect in which the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the effect in which the character image is displayed.

The "development notice A1" displays the effect image of the "effect a1" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X12 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, the effect image of the "effect a1" (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. At the same time, the corresponding effect of moving the second decorative member 17B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" is executed.

The "development notice A2" displays the effect image of the "effect a2" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation of the effect button 18A is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X12 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect a2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the second decorative member 17B is used as a movable member. Is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the corresponding effect of the content is executed.

The "development notice A3" is produced as "development notice A1" except that the effect image of the "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of the "effect a1" and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

The "development notice A4" is the same as the "development notice A2" except that the effect button 18A is in a non-protruding state during the operation valid period.

"Development notice A5" is produced as "development notice A1" except that the effect image of "effect a2" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of "effect a1" and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

In the "development notice A6", the effect button 18A is in a non-protruding state during the operation valid period, and the effect image of the "effect a3" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of the "effect a2", and the movable member. The content of the production is the same as that of "Development notice A2" except that

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in "development notice A", "development notice A1" has the highest expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6". The execution ratio of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is set so as to decrease as "development notice A2" to "development notice A6".

In "development notice A", "development notice A1", "development notice A3", "development notice A5", and operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A are executed. It is composed of "development notice A2", "development notice A4", and "development notice A6". Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of "development notice A2", "development notice A4", and "development notice A6" is such that the operation promotion notice that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed. "Development notice A1" "development notice A3" "development notice A5" Is higher than the execution rate. Therefore, in the "development notice" effect of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is the operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variable effect of the effect mode A, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is high, which is higher than the effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. However, the jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production lever 19A.

Further, in the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in the variable effect that develops from "super reach" to "special reach", the effect button 18A is in a protruding state at a high rate during the operation valid period, and "super reach" is obtained. In the variable production that does not develop from "" to "special reach", the execution ratio of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is set so that the production button 18A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation valid period. ing.

The "decision effect A1" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash a1" on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In this "decision effect A1", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash a1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from to "moving position 1-2" is executed.

In the "decision effect A2", the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved and the effect image of the "flash a2" is displayed on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In this "decision effect A2", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation of the effect button 18A is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X22 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "flash a2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is "standby". Corresponding effect such as moving from "position 1" to "operating position 1-2" is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in "decision effect A", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" is "decision" rather than "decision effect A2". The execution ratios of "decision effect A1" and "decision effect A2" are set so that "effect A1" is higher. That is, the "decision effect A1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (first to third big hits, small hit) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

The "decision effect A" is composed of "decision effect A1" for executing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A and "decision effect A2" for executing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode A in which the jackpot probability is 1/350, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpot or the like, and when this loss occurs, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. The execution rate of the "decision effect A2" to be performed is higher than the execution rate of the "determination effect A1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode A, which is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which notification is executed. On the other hand, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode A, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and the operation of the effect button 18A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production lever 19A than in the production.

46 and 47 are tables that the sub CPU 102a refers to when determining the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 46 (b) shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the execution ratios (%) of "development notice B1" and "development notice B2" as "development notice B" are set, and serve as "decision effect B". The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect B1" and "decision effect B2" is set.

Further, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. FIG. 47A is a diagram showing a “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice B” in the effect mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a “decision effect B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “determination effect B” in the effect mode B.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 41, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 47 is executed in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "development notice B1" displays the effect image of the "effect b1" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice B1", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X41 described later) for validating the operation for the effect button 18A is set, and during the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is sent. It is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 66). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect b1" (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14. Perform a corresponding effect such as displaying on.

The "development notice B2" displays the effect image of the "effect b2" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice B2", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X41 described later) for validating the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is sent. It is executed (see (d-2-2) in FIG. 66). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "effect b2" (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14. , And so on.

In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in "development notice B", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice B1" and "development notice B2" is "development notice B2" and "development notice B2". The execution ratios of "development notice B1" and "development notice B2" are set so as to be higher than "B1".

The "development notice B" is composed of a "development notice B1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "development notice B2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode B in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, which is a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of big hits, and if there is a loss, the effect lever. The execution rate of "development effect B2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of "development effect B1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode B, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode B, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

The "decision effect B1" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash b1" on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In this "decision effect B1", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation of the effect button 18A is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X52 described later). (See (e-3-2) in FIG. 63). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash b1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed at the "standby position 1". ”To“ operating position 1-2 ”, and so on.

The "decision effect B2" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash b2" on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In this "decision effect B2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later). (See (e-3-3) in FIG. 67). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the effective operation period, the effect image of "flash b2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed from the "standby position 1" to "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), in the "decision effect B", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect B1" and the "decision effect B2" is more "determined" than the "decision effect B1". The execution ratios of "decision effect B1" and "decision effect B2" are set so that "effect B2" is higher. That is, the "decision effect B1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (first to third big hits, small hit) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

The "decision effect B" is composed of a "decision effect B1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "decision effect B2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode B, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the "decision effect B2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation for urging the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution rate of "decision effect B1" in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode B, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

48 and 49 are tables that the sub CPU 102a refers to when determining the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the “effect mode C”. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the execution ratios (%) of "development notice C1" and "development notice C2" as "development notice C" are set, and serve as "decision effect C". The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect C1" and "decision effect C2" is set.

Further, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode C. FIG. 49A is a diagram showing a “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice C” in the effect mode C. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a “decision effect C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “determination effect C” in the effect mode C.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 49 is executed in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "development notice C1" displays the effect image of the "effect c1" (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) on the image display device 14. The "development notice C1" displays the effect image of the "effect c1" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice C1", an operation valid period (for example, an operation valid period X71 described later) for validating the operation for the effect button 18A is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is sent. It is performed (see (g-2-1) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect c1" (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14. Perform a corresponding effect such as displaying on.

The "development notice C2" displays the effect image of the "effect c2" on the image display device 14. In this "development notice C2", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X71 described later) for validating the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is sent. It is performed (see (g-2-2) in FIG. 68). Then, the effect image of the "effect c2" (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period. , And so on.

In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in "development notice C", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice C1" and "development notice C2" is "development notice C2" and "development notice C2". The execution ratios of "development notice C1" and "development notice C2" are set so as to be higher than "C1".

The "development notice C" is composed of a "development notice C1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "development notice C2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode C in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, which is the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of jackpots, etc., and when there is a loss, the effect lever. The execution rate of "development effect C2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of "development effect C1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode C, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode C, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

The "decision effect C1" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash c1" on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this "decision effect C1", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the operation of the effect button 18A is performed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X72 described later). (See (g-3-2) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash c1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed at the "standby position 1". ”To“ operating position 1-2 ”, and so on.

The "decision effect C2" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash c2" on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this "decision effect C2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X52 described later). (See (g-3-3) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the effective operation period, the effect image of "flash c2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed from the "standby position 1" to "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), in "decision effect C", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "decision effect C1" and "decision effect C2" is "decision effect C1" rather than "decision effect C1". The execution ratios of "decision effect C1" and "decision effect C2" are set so that "effect C2" is higher. That is, the "decision effect B1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (first to third big hits, small hit) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

The "decision effect C" is composed of a "decision effect C1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "decision effect C2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode C, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, in the case of a loss, the execution rate of the "decision effect C2" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution rate of "decision effect C1" in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of is executed. Therefore, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode C, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

50 and 51 are tables referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and are stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variable effect pattern of the “effect mode D”. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “missing”. FIG. 50B shows each special for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small hit”. It is a figure which shows the special effect type determination table for determining the type of effect.

In the tables shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the execution ratios (%) of the "development notice D1" and the "development notice D2" as the "development notice D" are set, and the execution ratio (%) is set as the "decision effect D". The execution ratio (%) of "decision effect D1" and "decision effect D2" is set.

Further, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b, which stores the setting contents for each type of the special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. FIG. 51 (a) is a diagram showing a “development notice D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of the “development notice D” in the effect mode D. FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing a "decision effect D information table" that stores the setting contents for each type of the "determination effect D" in the effect mode D.

When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, it is determined which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 51 is executed in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b). It is decided by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table of.

The "development notice D1" displays the effect image of the "effect d1" (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In this "development notice D1", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X101 described later) for validating the operation for the effect button 18A is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is sent. Will be executed. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect d1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect is executed.

The "development notice D2" displays the effect image of the "effect d1" (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In this "development notice D2", an operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X101 described later) for validating the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and in the operation valid period, an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is sent. Will be executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "effect d2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in "development notice D", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "development notice D1" and "development notice D2" is "development notice D2" and "development notice D2". The execution ratios of "development notice D1" and "development notice D2" are set to be higher than "D1".

The "development notice D" is composed of a "development notice D1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "development notice D2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode D in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02, which is the high probability game state and the time-saving game state, the rate of loss is considerably higher than the rate of big hits, and the rate of loss is considerably higher in the effect mode D. In this case, the execution rate of "development effect D2" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of "development effect D1" in which the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. high. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode D, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the production mode D, when the ratio is lower than the loss, such as a big hit, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the production is performed. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A than in the effect of urging the operation of the lever 19A.

The "character notice D1" displays the effect image of the "character d1" on the image display device 14. In this "character notice D1", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means in which the operation is valid during the operation validity period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation validity period (for example, the operation validity period Y101 described later). Not done (see (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "character d1" described later (see (j-4-3) in FIG. 71) is displayed as an image. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

The "character notice D2" is the same as the "character notice D1" except that the effect image of the "character d2" (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of the "character d1".

The "character notice D3" displays the effect image of the "character d3" on the image display device 14. In this "character notice D3", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation validity period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation validity period (for example, the operation validity period Y101 described later). Not done (see (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of the "character d3" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in "Development notice D", "Character notice D1" has the highest expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of "Character notice D1" to "Character notice D3". The execution ratios of "Character Notice D1" to "Character Notice D3" are set so as to become lower as "Character Notice D2" and "Character Notice D3" are reached.

"Character notice D" includes "Character notice D1" and "Character notice D2" for executing operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production button 18A, and "Character notice D" for executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A. It is composed of "D3". Then, in the effect mode D, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the "development effect D3" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation for urging the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution rate of "Character notice D1" and "Character notice D2" in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the "development effect" of the effect mode D, which is in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, in the "development notice" of the effect mode D, when there is a big hit or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

The "decision effect D1" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash d1" on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In this "decision effect D1", the effect button 18A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period X102 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash d1" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is "standby". Corresponding effect such as moving from "position 1" to "operating position 1-2" is executed.

The "decision effect D2" moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of the "flash d2" on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In this "decision effect D2", the effect lever 19A is selected as the operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation valid period, and the effect lever 19A is operated during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later). The operation promotion notification is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, the effect image of "flash d2" is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to "standby position 1". The corresponding effect of the content such as moving from to "moving position 1-2" is executed.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the "decision effect D", the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of the "decision effect D1" and the "decision effect D2" is more "determined" than the "decision effect D2". The execution ratios of the "decision effect D1" and the "decision effect D2" are set so that the "effect D1" is higher. That is, the "decision effect D1" is determined at a higher rate when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a hit (first to third big hits, small hit) than when the judgment result of the big hit judgment is a loss. To.

In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the case of "decision effect D", in the case of loss, "decision effect D2" is executed at a higher rate than "decision effect D1", so that a big hit or a small hit is executed. In the case of, each execution ratio is set so that the “decision effect D1” is executed at a higher rate than the “decision effect D2”.

The "decision effect D" is composed of a "decision effect D1" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and a "decision effect D2" that executes an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Will be done. Then, in the effect mode D, which is a high-probability game state and a time-saving game state, the execution ratio of the "decision effect D2" in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is the operation for urging the operation of the effect button 18A. It is higher than the execution rate of the "decision effect D1" in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode D, which is in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. Is higher than the rate at which is executed. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, in the "decision effect" of the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The jackpot expectation (reliability) is higher in the production that encourages the operation of the production button 18A than in the production.

It should be noted that the jackpot expectations are different for the "development notice" and the "decision effect" in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. That is, among the "development notice B1" executed in the production mode B, the "development notice C1" executed in the production mode C, and the "development notice D1" executed in the production mode D, the "development notice D1" The jackpot expectation (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation decreases as it becomes "development notice C1" and "development notice B1". Further, among the "decision effect B1" executed in the effect mode B, the "determined effect C1" executed in the effect mode C, and the "determined effect D1" executed in the effect mode D, the "determined effect D1" The jackpot expectation (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation decreases as it becomes "decision effect C1" and "decision effect B1". Therefore, in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state, it can be said that the expectation of a big hit by the effect using the effect button 18A increases as the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D progress.

As a special effect in the figure variation effect, the sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (effect button 18A or effect lever 19A) during the operation valid period during which the operation on the operation means (effect button 18A or effect lever 19A) is valid. The corresponding effect is executed based on.

The sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period (first period) in the specific gaming state. In the second period after the period of), the operation valid period is set during the variation effect.

That is, the operation valid period is set at a higher rate in the variable effect of the effect mode C (31st to 74th variation) than in the variable effect of the effect mode B (1st to 30th variation). Further, the operation valid period is set during the variation effect at a higher rate in the variation effect (75th to 84th variation) in the effect mode D than in the variation effect in the effect mode C.

In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific game state (high probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the later period (first period) in the specific game state. In the second period after the first period), the operation valid period in which the effect button 18A as the operation means for validating the operation is set to the protruding state, which is the second state, is set.

Further, when the sub CPU 102a is in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A at a higher rate than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher expectation of big hit than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. .. On the other hand, in the case of a specific gaming state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state), a higher proportion of the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. Execute with. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A than in the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variable effect pattern determination process by the effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. 35.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a is set by the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described later by referring to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Check the effect mode and select the variable effect pattern determination table associated with the current effect mode.

In step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode A", , The variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

Alternatively, in step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode B". Select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B shown in FIG. 41.

Alternatively, in step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode C". Select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C shown in FIG. 42.

Alternatively, in step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode D". Select the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG. 43.

Alternatively, in step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is "effect mode E". Selects a variable effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown).

In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of variation effect patterns are stored in association with the variation effect pattern determination value for each special figure variation pattern designation command in each effect mode. The variable effect pattern is identification information representing the effect content of the variable effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variable effect.

The variation effect pattern is associated with the components of the variation effect such as the time of the variation effect, the mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In the variable effect pattern of the variable effect in the image display device 14, the display mode of the variable display of the effect symbol and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also components of the variable effect. It is associated.

In step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for determining the variation effect pattern. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random number value indicated by the random number counter related to the random number for determining the variation effect pattern in the random number storage area for determining the variation effect pattern of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a collates the random number for determining the variation effect pattern stored in the random number storage area for determining the variation effect pattern in step S1313-4 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby performing the variation effect pattern. Performs the process of determining.

In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a provides information indicating execution (〇) and non-execution (x) of the special effect associated with the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-4 (FIGS. 40 to 40). By confirming (see FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect in the variation effect of the determined variation effect pattern. When the sub CPU 102a determines that the special effect is to be executed, the process is transferred to step S1311-6, and when it is determined that the special effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311-9.

In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern A034" in step S1311-4, the sub CPU 102a executes "line notice A", "character notice A", and "development notice A" as special effects in this step S1311-6. Then, confirm that the "decision effect A" is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all of the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process is transferred to step S1311-9, and if it is determined that the process is not completed, the process is returned to step S1311-7.

For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines the "variable effect pattern A034" in step S1311-4, in step S1311-7, the execution ratio is set according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A of FIG. 44 (b). Determine one of "Speech Notice A1" to "Speech Notice A5" as the type of "Speech Notice A", and determine any of "Character Notice A1" to "Character Notice A5" as the type of "Character Notice A". Then, one of "development notice A1" to "development notice A6" is determined as the type of "development notice A".

In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by using the vibration of the effect button 18A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, and determines whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the random value for the specific effect determination. judge. In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not performed when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is the normal effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H04H", it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50% (◯), and that the specific effect is not executed (x) at a rate of 50%. When the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H0CH", it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 80% (◯), and that the specific effect is not executed at a rate of 20% (x).

In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not it is determined in step S1311-9 that the specific effect is executed (◯). Then, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (◯), the process is transferred to step S1311-11, and when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (x), the process is transferred to step S1311-12.

In step S1311-11, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any or a combination of the vibration of the effect button 18A, the output of a pseudo sound of the sound that the effect button 18A vibrates, and the display of the image that the effect button 18A vibrates. Further, the vibration of the effect button 18A is performed by one of two types, low-speed vibration and high-speed vibration.

The specific effect type determination process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 36. First, in step S1311-11-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the vibration speed determination random value to set the vibration speed to "low speed". "And" high speed "are decided. As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), the effect button 18A can vibrate. The "high speed" is a vibration speed at which the vibration is transmitted to the player as "pocopocopocopoco" when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating. On the other hand, "low speed" means, as described above, when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "poco ... poco ...". Vibration speed.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E6H05H", it is determined to be "high speed" at a rate of 50% and "low speed" at a rate of 50%. When the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is "E7H5BH", it is determined to be "high speed" at a rate of 90% and "low speed" at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A being determined to be "high speed" rather than "low speed" is higher than in the case of loss. In addition, the higher the jackpot expectation level of the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the higher the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be "high speed" rather than "low speed". The ratio is getting higher. Therefore, when executing a specific effect, the effect with a higher expectation of a big hit is obtained when the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is "high speed" than when it is "low speed". If it is determined to be "high speed" in this step, the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed when the specific effect is executed, and if it is determined to be "low speed", the effect button 18A is vibrated at low speed when the specific effect is executed. ..

In step S1311-11-2, the sub CPU 102a executes an audio output determination process for determining whether or not to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect audio output determination table shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, and uses the received special figure variation pattern specification command and the audio output determination random value to determine the presence or absence of audio output. decide. The sound output is to output the sound such as "pocopocopocopoco" or "poco ... poco ..." which is the vibration sound of the effect button 18A from the audio output device 15 during the execution of the specific effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E6H05H", it is decided to execute the audio output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute the audio output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. When the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H5BH", it is decided to execute the audio output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute the audio output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the voice output (○) is higher than in the case of the loss. Further, the higher the jackpot expectation is for the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command, the higher the ratio of executing the audio output (○). Therefore, when executing a specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A has a higher expectation of big hit than the effect of not outputting the sound.

In steps S1311-11-3, the sub CPU 102a executes an image output determination process for determining whether or not to output simulated image data of the effect button 18A that vibrates in the specific effect.

Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, and determines whether or not to output an image by using the received special figure fluctuation pattern specification command and the random value for image output determination. To do. The output of the image means that the image display device 14 displays an image simulating how the effect button 18A is vibrating during the execution of the specific effect.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E6H05H", it is decided to execute the image output at a rate of 50% (○) and not to execute the image output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. When the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is "E7H5BH", it is decided to execute the image output at a rate of 90% (○) and not to execute the image output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the image output (◯) is higher than in the case of the loss. In addition, the higher the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command, the higher the rate of executing the image output (◯). Therefore, when executing a specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo image of the vibrating effect button 18A has a higher expectation of a big hit than the effect of not outputting the image.

In this way, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode in the specific effect by executing the process of step S1311-11-1 to step S1311-11-3. The vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the vibrating effect button 18A are each determined according to the jackpot expectation. That is, whether the effect button 18A vibrates at "high speed" or "low speed" in the specific effect, whether the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, or whether the image display device 14 is produced. Whether or not an image representing the button 18A is displayed suggests a jackpot expectation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the jackpot expectation is gradually increased by the combination of the vibration velocity of the effect button 18A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A. It is different.

Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation of the specific effect shown in FIG. 60, the effect button 18A vibrates at "high speed" in the specific effect, a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output, and further. When the image of the effect button 18A is displayed, the effect suggests the highest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, if the effect button 18A only vibrates at a "low speed" and the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A or the image of the effect button 18A is not output, the specific effect of the lowest jackpot expectation is obtained.

In the present embodiment, when executing the specific effect, as shown in the specific effect type determination process of FIG. 36, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A. Whether or not to output the image of the vibrating effect button 18A is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, a combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of the output of the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of the output of the image of the vibrating effect button 18A is set in advance. , Which combination of specific effects may be determined according to the jackpot expectation. Further, each variation effect pattern may be set in association with a combination of specific effects.

When the specific effect type determination process is completed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1311-12.

In step S1311-12, the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect control command corresponding to the variation effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, the information of the type of special effect determined in step S1311-7, and the information of the type of special effect determined in step S1311-11. The information of the type of the specific effect is included, and the variable effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1311-13, the sub CPU 102a stores the variation effect data corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variation effect in the variation effect timer counter. .. The fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to "4" addition processing in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the fluctuation effect at the present time by the fluctuation effect timer counter.

The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Then, when the image control board 105 receives the variation effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command, and the voice output device of the variation effect. Control the output from 15. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect effect device 17 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 16 in the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern indicated by the command.

Further, the image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation effect control command received from the effect control board 102. Control and control to output the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the variation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 controls the operation of the effect accessory device 17 and the lighting control of the effect lighting device 16 in the special effect associated with the variation effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting process by the production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 37.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect symbol designation command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-2, confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. .. When the sub CPU 102a confirms that there is a loss, the process shifts to step S1314-3, and when it confirms that there is no loss, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1314-7.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information possessed by the special effect symbol designation command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b, collates the confirmed special symbol determination result with the effect mode determination table, and determines the effect mode.
When the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, as shown in FIG. 39, the "effect mode B" is determined. As a result, the "effect mode B" is set after the end of the first big hit game or after the end of the second big hit game.
Further, when the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or small hit, the "effect mode E" is determined as shown in FIG. 39. As a result, the "effect mode E" is set after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game.

In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores the effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of times the effect mode can be executed associated with the effect mode. (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is terminated.

The number of times the effect mode can be executed is the number of variable effects that can be executed depending on the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of variable effects (M: effect mode remaining number) that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When the "effect mode B" is determined in step S1314-7 described above, the "effect mode B" is set after the end of the first jackpot game or the end of the second jackpot game, and the number of times the effect mode can be executed ( 30 times are stored as Ma).
Further, when the "effect mode E" is determined in step S1314-7 described above, the "effect mode E" is set after the end of the third big hit game or the end of the small hit game, and the number of times the effect mode can be executed is set. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the effect mode A is currently set, that is, whether or not the effect mode flag “00H” is set in the effect mode flag storage area.

When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization process of step S10 in the main process of the main control board described above, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode flag “00H” to the effect mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

In step S1314-3, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode is A, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the effect mode is not A, in step S1314-4, the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is subtracted by "1" to update the effect mode remaining number (M), and step S1314. At −5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

In step S1314-5, when the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the effect mode remaining number (M) is not "0", the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process, and the counter value becomes ". If it is determined to be "0", in step S1314-6, the effect mode flag of the "transition destination effect mode" shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (transition destination effect mode setting), and the effect mode setting is performed. End the process.

For example, the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode B in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state after the first big hit game or the second big hit game, and M = 0 in step S1314-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S1314-5), in step S1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode (transition destination effect mode) after the effect mode B.

If the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode C and determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 (YES in S1314-5), the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode C in step S1314-6. The effect mode D is set as the later effect mode (transition destination effect mode).

If the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode D and determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 (YES in S1314-5), the sub CPU 102a is set to the effect mode D in step S1314-6. The effect mode A is set as the later effect mode (transition destination effect mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 39, the effect mode A is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is won, if the number of special figure fluctuations is 1 to 30 times. The effect mode B is set, and the effect mode C is set when the special figure variation number is 31 to 74 times, and the effect mode D is set when the special figure variation number is 75 to 84 times.
Further, if the number of changes in the special figure after the third big hit game or the small hit game when the third big hit or the small hit is won is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

The sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table according to the effect mode set in this way.

The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“line notice”, “character notice”, “development notice”, “decision effect”) among the variation effect patterns shown in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIGS. 40 to 43 described above. A special effect pattern associated with the information of (○) and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect based on the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 is determined, and the special effect pattern associated with the determined variation effect pattern is determined. As the type of effect, the type of special effect associated with the operation validity period shown in FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 51, and the specific effect type determination table of FIGS. 54 to 59 are referred to. When the type of is determined, the operation validity period is set in the variable effect.

As can be seen from the execution ratio (ratio of ○) of the special effect of FIGS. 40 to 43 and FIGS. 44, 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a is in the “effect mode” of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state. The operation valid period to be executed in "A" is executed in "effect mode B" to "effect mode D" in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state at a rate higher than the rate of determining the type of the associated special effect. Determine the type of special effect associated with the operation validity period. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than the ratio during which the operation is valid in the variable effect of the "effect mode A" in the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state, and the "effect mode" in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. The operation validity period is set in the variable effect of "B" to "effect mode D".

Then, as can be seen from the execution ratios of the special effects (ratio of ◯) in FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102a is used after the first jackpot game is completed and in the second jackpot game. Of the "directing mode B" to "directing mode D" of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of, "directing mode B" and "directing mode C" , The type of special effect associated with the operation validity period is determined as the type of special effect to be executed in that mode at a higher rate as the "effect mode D" is set. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher proportion of the "effect mode B" to "effect mode D" than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller, and the effect mode has a larger number of special figure fluctuations. In (second period), the operation valid period is set during the fluctuation effect. Here, among the "directing mode B" to "directing mode D", a higher proportion of the "directing mode B", "directing mode C", and "directing mode D" is executed in that mode. As the type, the type of the special effect associated with the operation validity period in which the operation means is in the protruding state (second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher proportion of the "effect mode B" to "effect mode D" than the effect mode (first period) in which the number of special figure fluctuations is smaller, and the effect mode has a larger number of special figure fluctuations. In the (second period), the operation valid period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) during the variation effect is set.

(Production input control processing by the production control board)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 38.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a has an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A, and an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A. By determining whether or not any of the above has been input, it is determined whether or not any of these operating means has been operated.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1402 when it is determined that an operation has been performed on any of the operating means, and when it is determined that no operation has been performed on any of the operating means, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1402. The effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol is currently being displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1403 and changes the special symbol. If it is determined that the display is not displayed, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a confirms the variation effect pattern of the variation effect executed in response to the variation display of the current special symbol stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the operation valid period in the variation effect according to the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403 is in progress, and if it is determined that the operation is in the operation valid period, the process is performed in step S1405. If it is determined that the operation is not in the valid period, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a refers to FIGS. 45, 47, 49, and 51 during the operation valid period determined in step S1404, and the operating means activated in this operation valid period is produced. Check whether it is the button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Then, whether or not the activated operation means has been operated depends on whether or not the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a is input. Judge based on.

That is, when the operation means activated during the operation valid period is the effect button 18A, it is determined whether or not the effect button operation detection signal is input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a, and the effect button 18A is activated during the operation valid period. When the operating means is the effect lever 19A, it is determined whether or not the effect lever operation detection signal is input from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a.
In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a operates by inputting the detection signal of the operation means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a during the operation valid period in step S1405. When it is determined that the designated operation to the activated operation means has been performed, the process is transferred to step S1406, and the detection signal of the operation means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. If it is determined that the designated operation for the operating means activated during the operation valid period has not been performed due to the fact that is not input, the effect input control process is terminated.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets a corresponding effect control command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c for controlling the corresponding effect based on the designated operation to the operation means for which the operation is enabled during the operation valid period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the subRAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1500. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform the effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

For example, when the sub CPU 102a confirms the “variation effect pattern A034” as the variation effect pattern in step S1403 and executes the “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a issues the corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and It is transmitted to the lamp control board 104. As a result, the image control board 105 controls to display the effect image of "line a1" as the corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C "operates" from the "standby position 3" as the corresponding effect. The movement operation to move to the "position 3" will be performed.

In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification for urging the player to operate the effect button 18A during the execution of the game effect related to the game using the game ball, such as the variation effect performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is performed. In the operation enabled state, the effect button 18A is in a non-protruding state (first state) or a protruding state (second state).

Here, a specific example of the variation effect will be described.
(Specific example of variable production of production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

In FIG. 61A, the time of the variation effect in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A034”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow. Further, in FIG. 61B, when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command "E6H0BH" or "E7H0BH" from the main control board 101 and determines the "variation effect pattern A038", it is executed and the specific effect is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the fluctuation effect to execute. Further, in FIG. 61 (c), the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A042”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern A034 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A034" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a starts from the timing T11 shown in FIG. The effect control for executing the variable effect up to the timing T14 is performed. FIG. 62 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 51 (a), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (a-1) from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and "normal reach A1-1" in the period (a-2) from the timing T12 to the timing T13. After that, in the period (a-3) and the period (a-4) from the timing T13 to the timing T14, the effect control for executing the "super reach A1-1" is performed.

In the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for displaying the effect image in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variablely displayed on the image display device 14.

In the "symbol variation A1-1" in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes a plurality of special effect symbols and a predetermined character "character a1 (Kunoichi)" appears in FIG. 62. The effect control for displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-1) on the image display device 14 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "line notice A" as a special effect in this "design variation A1-1". The "line notice A" is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game and gives a feeling of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

The sub CPU 102a is set as the “line notice A” according to the execution ratio of the “line notice A” in the “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b), as shown in FIG. 45 (a). The effect control for executing any one of "line notice A1" to "line notice A5" shown in the special effect information table is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in "design variation A1-1", the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 61 (a). The operation validity period X11 to be valid is set (see FIG. 45 (a)).

In the operation valid period X11, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the case of "line notice A2" or "line notice A3" (a-1-2). The effect of displaying the effect image shown in (1) on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. Further, in the case of the "speech notice A1", the effect of displaying the effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 62 including the image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 is executed. To do. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

The sub CPU 102a is the "line notice A1" as shown in the execution ratios of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in the "variation effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). -During the operation valid period X11 of the "line notice A3", the state of the effect button 18A is left in the non-protruding state (first state)) and is not set to the protruding state (second state). The corresponding voice may be output from the voice output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A1", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a1" ("line a1") based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. The effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. 62 is displayed on the image display device 14 and the third decorative member 17C is set as a movable member in the “standby position 3”. The corresponding effect (notice effect) of the content such as moving to the "operation position 3" is executed. The sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the voice of the "line a1" from the voice output device 15.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the production image shown in (a-1-4) of 62, the image display device 14 displays the production image in which the "character a1" speaks the "line a2" ("Hundred cars acquired?"). Performs production control to execute the production (notice production).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. Unlike the production image shown in (a-1-4) of 62, the corresponding production (corresponding effect) in which the production image in which the "character a1" speaks "line a3" ("10 cars acquired?") Is displayed on the image display device 14. Performs effect control to execute the advance notice effect).

On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period X11 when executing the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5". That is, in the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5", the operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in FIG. 62 (a-1-2) is not displayed, and the "character" is displayed at a predetermined timing. A notice effect is executed in which an effect image of "a1" speaking a dialogue is displayed on the image display device 14. It should be noted that the advance notice production of the "line notice A4" and the "line notice A5" is an effect corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding effect.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A4", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the sub CPU 102a is different from the effect image shown in FIG. 62 (a-1-4) at a predetermined timing, and is different from the effect image shown in FIG. 62 (a-1-4). Performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image of "" speaking "line a4" ("Is it one car acquired?") On the image display device 14.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (a), unlike the effect image shown in FIG. 62 (a-1-4), the sub CPU 102a "character a1" at a predetermined timing. Performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) for displaying an effect image of "" speaking "line a5" ("earn money?") On the image display device 14.

In the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of FIG. 62 (a-2-1) on the image display device 14 to generate the reach state is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "character notice A" as a special effect in this "normal reach A1-1". Like the "line notice A", the "character notice A" is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game and gives a feeling of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

The sub CPU 102a has "character notice A1" to "character notice A" as "character notice A" according to the execution ratio of "character notice A" in the "variable effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). The effect control for executing any one of "Character notice A5" is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 61 (a). The operation validity period Y11 is set (see FIG. 45 (b)).

The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y11. That is, during the operation validity period Y11, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) of FIG. 62, which does not include the image of the operation promotion notification. Take control.

The sub CPU 102a is the "character notice A1" as shown in the execution ratios of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" in the "variable effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). In the operation valid period Y11 of the "character notice A3", the state of the effect button 18A is left in the non-protruding state (first state) so as not to be in the protruding state.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period Y11, as shown in (a-2-4) of FIG. 62. , In the image display device 14, an effect for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect) such that a new character "character a2-1" is additionally displayed in addition to the already displayed "character a1". Take control.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the device 14, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) of the content such as additionally displaying the "character a2-2" different from the "character a2-1" is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y11. In the device 14, the effect control for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect) of the content such as additionally displaying "character a2-3" different from "character a2-1" and "character a2-2" is performed.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period Y11 when executing the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5". That is, in the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5", the image of the operation promotion notification as shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) of FIG. At the timing, the effect control for executing the advance notice effect in which a new character is additionally displayed is performed. The notice production of the "character notice A4" and the "character notice A5" is a production corresponding to the above-mentioned corresponding production.

When executing the "character notice A4", the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which the "character a2-4" (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Controls the effect for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect).

When executing the "character notice A5", the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image to which the "character a2-5" (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Controls the effect for executing the advance notice effect (corresponding effect).

During the period (a-3) of "Super Reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and "Character a3 (A child)" is displayed. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect that appears on the image display device 14 is performed.

In the "symbol variation A1-1" in this period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and at the same time, "character a3 (A child)". Is controlled for displaying the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG. 53 on the image display device 14.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in this "super reach A1-1". In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1311-11. When executing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but is not limited to this, for example, in the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4). , The specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

In addition, the sub CPU 102a fuels the development of the "Super Reach A1-1" as a special production to the "Special Reach A1-1", which is a production with higher reliability for big hits than the "Super Reach A1-1". Execute "Development Notice A". Like "Speech Notice A" and "Character Notice A", "Development Notice A" is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a feeling of expectation that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. is there.

The sub CPU 102a has "development notice A1" to "development notice A1" as "development notice A" according to the execution ratio of "development notice A" in the "variation effect pattern A034" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). Control the production to execute any of the "development notice A6".

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of the "development notice A1" to the "development notice A6" in the "super reach A1-1", the operation valid period X12 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. (See FIG. 45 (c)).

As shown in FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14. The image of this operation promotion notification consists of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge, or the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of.

However, the effect image of (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation valid period X12, and is an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state. Contains images.

On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12, as shown in FIG. 62 (a-3-4). An effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 17B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" and emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Controls the effect to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A2", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X12. The second decorative member 17B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 14 displays an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B. Control the production to execute the corresponding production (development notice).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A3", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the image display device 14 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A4", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 18A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2", and the image display device 14 displays an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B. , And so on, to control the production to execute the corresponding production (development notice).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A5", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the image display device 14 is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X12. In, the effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a2) is performed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A6", as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the sub CPU 102a is pressed once for the non-protruding effect button 18A during the operation valid period X12. Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

The sub CPU 102a includes two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (a-4) of "Super Reach A1-1". By having the same numerical value, the image display device 14 is controlled to display the effect image shown in FIG. 62 (a-4) in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A022 (loss))
When the jackpot determination result is "loss" and "variation effect pattern A022" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically the "sub CPU 102a" shown in FIG. 61 (a). The same variation effect as in "Variation effect pattern A034" is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (a-1) from the timing T11 to the timing T12, and the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (a-2) from the timing T12 to the timing T13. Is executed, and the effect control for executing the effect of the period (a-3) of the “super reach A1-1” from the timing T13 is performed.

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern A022", the sub CPU 102a stops during the period (a-4) because the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol. The effect control for displaying the effect image of FIG. 62 (A-1) is performed. As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern A038 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A038" is selected in the low probability gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a starts from the timing T21 shown in FIG. 61 (b). The effect control for executing the variable effect up to the timing T24 is performed.

FIG. 63 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 61 (b), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a first decorative member 17A, and a second decorative member 17B.

The sub CPU 102a executes "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A038", and executes the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (b-1) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. In order to execute "normal reach A1-1" in -2), and then to execute "special reach A1-1" in the period (b-3) and period (b-4) from timing T23 to timing T24. Performs production control.

In the "design variation A1-1" in the period (b-1), the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image of the above (a-1-1), and then ( The effect image of (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image of a-1-2) or the effect image of (b-1--3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-1-3) is displayed. ..

The effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 63 shows the image of the corresponding effect in the “line notice A2”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A2", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a2" ("line a2") based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X11. Is it possible to acquire 100 cars? ”). The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) of displaying the effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 63 on the image display device 14 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a displays the production image of (b-2-1) of FIG. 54 corresponding to the production image of (a-2-1) of FIG. 62 in the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (b-2). After that, the effect image of (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-2) or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-3) is displayed. To do.

The effect image shown in FIG. 63 (b-2-4) shows the image of the corresponding effect in the "character notice A2". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A2", the "character a2-2" is added based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y21 (b). -2-4) The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

During the period (b-3) of the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a first, in the image display device 14, first, "character b1 (samurai)" together with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) ”Performs the effect control to display the effect image ((b-3-1) of FIG. 63) of the reach effect that tries to capture the“ character c1 (thief) ”.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in this "special reach A1-1". In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process of step S1311-11. When executing the specific effect, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b) in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

When executing the "decision effect A1" in the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation validity period X22 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 61 (b). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

As shown in FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 during the operation valid period X22. Perform the production to make. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-3), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "Pull!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X22, as shown in FIG. 63 (b-3-4). In addition, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition to moving to, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original "standby position 1".

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A2", as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A (see FIG. 45 (d)). ..

As shown in FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 during the operation valid period X22. Perform the production to make. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), the image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "press!" Together with the image of the effect button 18A in the protruding state and the timer gauge.

The image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 does not have to indicate the state of the effect button 18A during the operation valid period. For example, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate a non-projection state (first state) when the effect button 18A is in the projecting state (second state) during the operation valid period. When the effect button 18A is in the non-protruding state (first state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate the projecting state (second state).

In the variable effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position) in this "decision effect". ) Does not work.

Further, in the variable effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" in this "decision effect". Only move it.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that it has won the "first big hit" to play the game.

The sub CPU 102a includes two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (b-4) of "special reach A1-1". By having the same numerical value, the three special production symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and in (b-4) of FIG. 63 in which the "character b1" is capturing the "character c1". The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A026 (loss))
When the jackpot determination result is "loss" and "variation effect pattern A026" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically the "sub CPU 102a" shown in FIG. 61 (b). The same variation effect as "Variation effect pattern A038" is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation A1-1" in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22, and the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (b-2) from the timing T22 to the timing T23. Is executed, and the effect control for executing the effect of the period (b-3) of the “special reach A1-1” from the timing T23 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect A1" as the "determination effect A" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect A" in the "variation effect pattern A026" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (a). The effect control for executing any one of the "decision effect A2" is performed.

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern A026", the sub CPU 102a does not execute either the "determined effect A1" or the "determined effect A2" of the "special reach A1-1", the first decorative member 17A. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a is a diagram in which the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols stops without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character c1" escapes from the "character b1". By displaying the effect image of (B-1) of 63, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern A042 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern A042" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a starts from the timing T31 shown in FIG. 61 (c). The effect control for executing the variable effect up to the timing T35 is performed. FIG. 61 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 61 (c), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern A042", and executes the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (c-1) from the timing T32 to the timing T33. In -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, then "super reach A1-1" is executed in the period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and the period from timing T34 to timing T35. The effect is controlled so as to execute the "special reach A1-1" in the period (c-4) and the period (c-5).

The sub CPU 102a is the “design variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), and the sub CPU 102a is the production image of (a-1-1) of FIG. 64 (c-1-1) of FIG. The effect of displaying the effect image of the above on the image display device 14 is executed.

The sub CPU 102a executes "line notice A" as a special effect in this "design variation A1-1".

The sub CPU 102a is set as the “line notice A” according to the execution ratio of the “line notice A” in the “variable effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b), as shown in FIG. 45 (a). One of "Speech notice A1" to "Speech notice A5" shown in the special production information table is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "line notice A1" to "line notice A3" in "design variation A1-1", as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the effect button 18A or the effect lever The operation valid period X31 for validating the operation of 19A is set (see FIG. 45 (a)).

During the operation validity period X31, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) of FIG. 64 including the image of the operation promotion notification on the image display device 14. To do.

The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 64 shows the image of the corresponding effect in the “line notice A3”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "line notice A3", the "character a1" is changed to the "line a3" ("line a3") based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X31. Is it possible to acquire ten cars? ”), And the corresponding effect (notice effect) of displaying the effect image (c-1-4) of FIG. 64 on the image display device 14 is executed.

In the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first has the effect image of (c-2-1) of FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) of FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a executes "character notice A" as a special effect in this "normal reach A1-1".

The sub CPU 102a has "character notice A1" to "character notice A" as "character notice A" according to the execution ratio of "character notice A" in the "variable effect pattern A042" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). Execute any of "Character Notice A5".

When the sub CPU 102a executes any of "character notice A1" to "character notice A3" as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. 61 (c). The operation validity period Y31 is set (see FIG. 45 (b)).

The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y31. That is, during the operation validity period Y31, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) of FIG. 64, which does not include the image of the operation promotion notification, on the image display device 14. Perform the production to be done.

The effect image shown in (c-2-4) of FIG. 64 shows an image of the corresponding effect in "Character notice A3". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "character notice A3", the "character a2-3" is added based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period Y31 (the sub CPU 102a). A corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

In this "super reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a performs production control for executing the "development notice A" that fuels the development to the "special reach A1-1".

The sub CPU 102a has "development notice A1" to "development notice A1" as "development notice A" according to the execution ratio of "development notice A" in the "variation effect pattern A042" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (b). Control the production to execute any of the "development notice A6".

The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X32 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A regardless of any of the "development notice A1" to the "development notice A6" in the "super reach A1-1" (. See FIG. 45 (c)).

As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a includes an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (c-3-2) or an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X32. The effect of displaying the effect image of (c-3-3) including the image of (c-3-3) on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is composed of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge. Further, the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the images of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

FIG. 64 (c-3-4) shows an example of "development notice A1". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X32, as shown in FIG. 64 (c-3-4). An effect image (effect a1) for moving the second decorative member 17B as a movable member from the "standby position 2" to the "operating position 2" and emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Controls the effect to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

During the period (c-4) of the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a first displays "character b1 (samurai)" together with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in the image display device 14. ) ”Performs the effect control for displaying the effect image ((c-4-1) of FIG. 64) of the reach effect that tries to capture the“ character c1 (thief) ”.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in this "special reach A1-1". Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A" in the "special reach A1-1", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation validity period X33 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A as shown in FIG. 61 (c). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

In the operation valid period X33, as shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a includes the effect image shown in (c-4-2) including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or the operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification on the image display device 14 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification consists of the characters "press!" Along with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge in the protruding state (c-4-2), or the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge. It consists of the characters "Pull it!" (C-4-2).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A1", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X33, as shown in FIG. 64 (c-4-4). In addition, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" to the "operating position 1-2" which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition to moving to, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original "standby position 1".

Further, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect A2", the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 64 (c-4-4) based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed during the operation valid period X33. As shown, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” and is located at the lower side of the front surface of the image display device 14, “operating position 1-”. In addition to moving to 2 ”, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).

In the variable effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position) in this "decision effect". ) Does not work.

Further, in the variable effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" in this "decision effect". Only move it.
As described above, in the "decision effect" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2", the judgment result of the jackpot is the first jackpot of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that it has won the "first big hit" to play the game.

The sub CPU 102a includes two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (c-5) of "special reach A1-1". By having the same numerical value, the three special production symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and in (c-5) of FIG. 64 in which "character b1" is capturing "character c1". The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern A030 (loss))
When the jackpot determination result is "loss" and "variation effect pattern A030" is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically the "sub CPU 102a" shown in FIG. 61 (c). The same variation effect as "Variation effect pattern A042" is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation A1-1" in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32, and the "normal reach A1-1" in the period (c-2) from the timing T32 to the timing T33. , And the "Super Reach A1-1" from the timing T33 to the timing T34 is executed, and the production control for the period (c-4) of the "Special Reach A1-1" from the timing T34 is executed. I do.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect A1" as the "determination effect A" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect A" in the "variation effect pattern A030" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44 (a). The effect control for executing any one of the "decision effect A2" is performed.
However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern A030", the sub CPU 102a sets the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to the other from the "standby position 1" regardless of whether the "determined effect A1" or the "determined effect A2" is executed. Do not operate up to the position (operating position) of. Then, the sub CPU 102a is a diagram in which the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols stops without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character c1" escapes from the "character b1". The effect control for displaying the effect image of 64 (C-1) is performed. As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Specific example of variable production in production mode B)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the 1st to 30th variations in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described.
FIG. 65A shows a temporal flow of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. Further, in FIG. 65B, the time of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow. Further, in FIG. 65 (c), the time of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern B019 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern B019" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 65 (a). ), The effect control for executing the variation effect from the timing T401 to the timing T403 is performed.

FIG. 66 shows an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 and an effect button 18A in the variation effect shown in FIG. 65 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403 and In the period (d-4), the effect control for executing the "special character reach B1-1" is performed.

The sub CPU 102a controls the effect of displaying the effect image that changes the plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of the “design variation B3-1”.

During the period (d-1) of the “design variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the effect image (d-1) of FIG. 66 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. To control.

Then, in the period (d-2) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The production images of (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) of the reach fanning of FIG. 66, such as whether or not the reach state is generated by stopping at, are displayed as images. The effect control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

In this "design variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a performs an effect control for executing "development notice B" that fuels the development to "special character reach B1-1" as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a has "development notice B1" and "development notice B1" as "development notice B" according to the execution ratio of "development notice B" in the "variation effect pattern B019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b). Control the production to execute any of the "development notice B2".

When either "development notice B1" or "development notice B2" is executed, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the "design variation B3-1". Set the operation valid period X41. The operation validity period X41 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

As shown in FIG. 66, the sub CPU 102a has an effect image (d-2-1) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X41. The effect of displaying the effect image (d-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice B1" consists of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge (d-2-1), and is of "development notice B2". The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge (d-2-2).

The effect image of (d-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation valid period X41 of the "development notice B2", and the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed. Includes an image of the operation promotion notification that prompts.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice B1", the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X41, and the sub CPU 102a has a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect. An effect for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) superimposed on the image display device 14. Take control.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice B2", the sub CPU 102a is superimposed on the special production symbol of the reach fanning effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X41. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying the effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having the effect b2 (orange) on the image display device 14 is performed.

FIG. 66 (d-2-3) shows an example of "development notice B1". When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice B1", the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the protruding effect button 18A during the operation valid period X41, and is based on (d-2) in FIG. As shown in -3), the corresponding effect (development notice) is executed, such as displaying the effect image (effect b1) on the image display device 14 by superimposing it on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect.

Further, in the "development notice B2", the sub CPU 102a has a reach different from that of (d-2-3) of FIG. 70 based on the fact that the effect lever 19A is tilted during the operation validity period X41. The effect control for executing the development notice (corresponding effect) such as displaying the effect image (effect b2) superimposed on the special effect pattern of the fan effect is performed.

During the period (d-3) of the "special character reach B1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and also displays the special character "character s1 (warrior)". The production images of (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in FIG. 66, in which "" fights against the special character "Character p1 (enemy warrior)", are displayed on the image display device 14. Controls the effect to be displayed.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in this "special character reach B1-1". Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

Then, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (d-4) of the "special character reach B1-1". By having the same numerical value as the symbol), the three special production symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and "Character s1" defeats "Character p1" (d-4). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern B013 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern B013" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 65. The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern B019" shown in (a) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation B3-1" in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period from the timing T402 to the timing T403 (d-3). ) And the period (d-4), "special character reach B1-1" is executed. Further, when executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed during the execution of "Special Character Reach B1-1".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern B019", the sub CPU 102a does not have the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols in the "special character reach B1-1". At the same time as stopping at, the effect control is performed to display the effect image (D-1) in which the "character s1" is defeated by the "character p1". As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern B021 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern B021" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 65 (b). ), The effect control for executing the variable effect from the timing T501 to the timing T503 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern B021", and starts from the timing T502. In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) up to the timing T503, the effect control for executing the "special character reach B2-1" is performed.

During the period (e-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for displaying an effect image that changes a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14.

In the period (e-1) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. 67 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. Performs production control.

Then, in the period (e-2) of the "symbol variation B3-1", the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The production images of (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) of the reach fanning of FIG. 67, such as whether or not the reach state is generated by stopping at, are displayed as images. The effect control for displaying on the device 14 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a controls the "design variation B3-1" to execute the "development notice B" that fuels the development to the "special character reach B2-1" as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a has "development notice B1" and "development notice B1" as "development notice B" according to the execution ratio of "development notice B" in the "variation effect pattern B021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b). Control to execute any of "Development Notice B2".

When either "development notice B1" or "development notice B2" is executed, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the "design variation B3-1". The operation valid period X51 is set. The operation validity period X51 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

As shown in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a has an effect image (e-2-1) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X51. The effect of displaying the effect image of the effect image (e-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice B1" consists of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge (e-2-1), and is of "development notice B2". The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge (e-2-2).

However, the effect image of (e-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation valid period X51 of the "development notice B1", and the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is performed. Includes an image of the operation promotion notification that prompts.

FIG. 67 (e-2-3) shows an example of “development notice B1”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice B1", the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the protruding effect button 18A during the operation valid period X51, and is based on (e-2) in FIG. As shown in -3), it is controlled to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 by superimposing it on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect.

Further, as shown in (e-2-3) of FIG. 67, the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X51 in the "development notice B2". , The effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 14 by superimposing it on the special effect symbol of the reach fanning effect, and the corresponding effect (development notice) is controlled to be executed.

During the period (e-3) of the "special character reach B2-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and also displays the special character "character s2 (warrior)". Performs effect control for displaying an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 67 in which "" fights against the special character "character p2 (enemy warrior)" on the image display device 14.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in this "special character reach B2-1". Then, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

Then, the sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect B" in the "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect B" as a special effect in the "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect B1" as the "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect B" in the "variation effect pattern B021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b). It is controlled to execute any one of the "decision effect B2".

FIG. 67 (e-3-2) shows an example of “decision effect B1”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect B1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X52 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, in the "special character reach B2-1". During the operation valid period X52, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-2) of FIG. 67) including an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state.

The sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 67 (e-3-4) based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X52 in this “decision effect B1”. In addition to displaying the effect image of the "flash b1" on the image display device 14, the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" on the front surface of the image display device 14. The "decision effect" (corresponding effect) of the content such as moving to the lower position "operation position 1-2" is executed.

FIG. 67 (e-3-3) shows an example of “decision effect B2”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect B2", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation validity period X52 that enables the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, in the "special character reach B2-1". The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-3) of FIG. 67) including an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X52.

In this "decision effect B2", the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of the "flash b2" on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X52. , The first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-2", which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via the "operating position 1-1". Execute the "decision effect" (corresponding effect) of the content.

The sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (e-4) of the "special character reach B2-1". By having the same numerical value as, the three special production symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and in (e-4) of FIG. 67 in which "character s2" defeats "character p2". The effect control for displaying the effect image to be shown on the image display device 14 is performed.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

In the variable effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "miss", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operation) in this "decision effect B". It does not operate to the position).

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is changed from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1-1" in this "decision effect B". Only move to.
As described above, in the "decision effect B" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2" of the above, the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" of performing the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It informs that the player has won the "1st jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

Then, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (e-3) of the "special character reach B2-1". By having the same numerical value as the symbol), the three special production symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and "Character s2" defeats "Character p2" in FIG. 67 (e-4). ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern B015 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern B015" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 57. The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern B021" shown in (b) is controlled. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502, and executes the "design variation B3-1" in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2), and the period from the timing T502 to the timing T503 (e-3). ) And the period (e-4), the effect is controlled so that the "special character reach B2-1" is executed. Further, when executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed during the execution of "Special Character Reach B2-1".

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect B1" as the "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect B" in the "variation effect pattern B015" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (a). Control is performed to execute any one of the "decision effect B2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern B015", the sub CPU 102a is the first decorative member regardless of whether the "determined effect B1" or the "determined effect B2" of the "special character reach B2-1" is executed. 17A is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effects symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character s2" is overthrown by the "character p2". The effect control for displaying the effect image of FIG. 67 (E-1) is performed. As a result, the player is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern B023 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern B023" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. ) Is controlled to execute the variation effect from the timing T601 to the timing T603.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern B023", and starts from the timing T602. In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) up to the timing T603, the effect control is performed so as to execute the "special character reach B3-1".

In the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern B023", the effect content of the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 is "variation effect pattern B019". It is the same as the production content of "Design variation B3-1".

In the sub CPU 102a, the operation valid period X61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the operation valid period X41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

During the period (f-3) of the "special character reach B3-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and also displays the special character "character s3 (warrior)". "(Not shown) fights against the special character" Character p3 (enemy warrior) "(not shown). The effect control is performed so that the effect image of the content is displayed on the image display device 14.

The sub CPU 102a controls to execute the "decision effect B" as a special effect in the "special character reach B3-1". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect B1" as the "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect B" in the "variation effect pattern B023" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (b). Execute any one of "decision effect B2". In the "decision effect B1" and "determination effect B2", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X62 as shown in FIG. 65 (c). Further, the specific effect execution period W61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

The sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (f-4) of the "special character reach B3-1". By having the same numerical value as, the three special effect symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and the effect image for notifying that the "character s3" has defeated the "character p3" is displayed on the image display device 14. Controls the display on.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern B017 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern B017" is selected in the 1st to 30th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically "variable". The effect is controlled so as to execute the same variable effect as in the effect pattern B023. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602, and executes the "symbol variation B3-1" in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T602 to the timing T603 (f-3). ) And the period (f-4), the effect control is performed so as to execute the "special character reach B3-1". When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W61 is set and the specific effect is executed while the "special character reach B3-1" is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W61, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect B1" as the "determination effect B" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect B" in the "variation effect pattern B017" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 46 (a). Execute any one of "decision effect B2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern B017", the sub CPU 102a is the first decorative member regardless of whether the "determined effect B1" or the "determined effect B2" of the "special character reach B3-1" is executed. 17A is not operated from the "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effects symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the "character s3" is overthrown by the "character p3". By displaying the effect image (not shown), it is notified that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "missing".

(Specific example of variable production of production mode C)
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C set in the 31st to 74th variations in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described.
FIG. 68A shows a temporal flow of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. Further, in FIG. 68B, the time of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow. Further, in FIG. 68C, the time of the variation effect to be executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern C019 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern C019" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 68 (a). ) Is controlled to execute the variation effect from the timing T701 to the timing T703.

FIG. 69 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 68A, and an effect button 18A and a first decorative member 17A.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and the period (g-3) and the period (g-3) from the timing T702 to the timing T703. During the period (g-4), "attack reach C1-1" is executed.

During the period (g-1) of the "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image that changes a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14.

During the period (g-1) of the “design variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the effect image (g-1) of FIG. 69 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. To execute.

Then, in the period (g-2) of the "symbol variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The production images of (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3) of the reach fan of FIG. 69, such as whether or not the reach state is generated by stopping at, are displayed as images. Controls the display on the device 14.

In this "design variation C3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes "development notice C" as a special effect to fuel the development to "attack reach C1-1". The sub CPU 102a has "development notice C1" and "development notice C1" as "development notice C" according to the execution ratio of "development notice C" in the "variation effect pattern C019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). Execute any of "Development Notice C2".

Regardless of whether the sub CPU 102a executes either the "development notice C1" or the "development notice C2", the operation valid period X71 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the operation means, in the "design variation C3-1". To set. The operation validity period X71 is a reach-inducing effect such as whether or not the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that has stopped earlier and a reach state occurs. Set during execution of.

As shown in FIG. 69, the sub CPU 102a has an effect image (g-2-1) including an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X71. The effect of displaying the effect image of the effect image (g-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification on the image display device 14 is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of "development notice B1" consists of the characters "press the button !!" together with the image of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge (g-2-1), and is of "development notice B2". The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters "pull the lever !!" together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge (g-2-2).

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice C1", the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X71, and the sub CPU 102a has a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect. A corresponding effect (development notice) is executed, such as displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) on the image display device 14.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice C2", the sub CPU 102a is superimposed on the special production symbol of the reach fanning effect based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X71. A corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having the effect c2 (red) on the image display device 14 is executed.

During the period (g-3) of "attack reach C1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value, and the character "character b1 (samurai)" is displayed. The image display device 14 is controlled to display an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG. 69, which has the content of sprinting and attacking an enemy. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W71 is set while the "attack reach C1-1" is being executed, and the specific effect is executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W71, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect C" as a special effect in the "attack reach C1-1". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). Execute any one of "decision effect C2".

(G-3-2) and (g-3-4) of FIG. 69 show an example of "decision effect C1". When executing the "decision effect C1", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, in the "attack reach C1-1". In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (a notification promotion image composed of the characters "press!" Together with the image of the effect button 18A in the protruding state and the timer gauge) is executed to urge the player to operate the effect button 18A.

In this "decision effect C1", the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X72, and the effect image of the "flash c1" is displayed on the image display device 14. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1" as a movable member, and the "operating position 1-2" which is the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14 is displayed. ”(Corresponding production) is executed.

FIG. 69 (g-3-3) shows an example of “decision effect C2”. When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect C2", the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 that enables the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is an operation means, in the "attack reach C1-1". In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (a notification promotion image consisting of the characters "Pull!" Together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge) is executed to urge the player to operate the effect lever 19A.

In this "decision effect C2", the sub CPU 102a tilts the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X72, and the image display device 14 displays the effect image of the "flash c2" (shown in the figure). The first decorative member 17A is displayed as a movable member from the “standby position 1” via the “operating position 1-1”, and the “operating position 1” which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14 is displayed. Execute a "decision effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to "-2".

In the variable effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is "miss", the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the "standby position 1" to another position (operation) in this "decision effect C". It does not operate to the position).

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is changed from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1-1" in this "decision effect C". Only move to.
As described above, in the "decision effect C" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2" of the above, the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" of performing the second jackpot game of 4R (round). It informs that the player has won the "1st jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

Then, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (g-4) of "attack reach C1-1". ), The three special effects symbols are stopped in the same numerical value, and (g-4) in FIG. 62 notifies that the "character b1" has "destroyed" the enemy. ) Is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern C013 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern C013" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 68. The same variation effect as the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C019" shown in (a) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation C3-1" in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and in the period (g-3) from the timing T702, " Execute "Attack Reach C1-1". When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W71 is set while the "attack reach C1-1" is being executed, and the specific effect is executed.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C013" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (a). Execute any one of "decision effect C2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern C019", the sub CPU 102a does not execute either the "determined effect C1" or the "determined effect C2" of the "attack reach C1-1", the first decorative member 17A. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the "character b1" has "failed" in the attack. By displaying the image (G-1), it is notified that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern C021 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern C021" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 68 (b). ) Is executed from the timing T801 to the timing T803.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C021", and starts from the timing T802. During the period (h-3) and period (h-4) up to the timing T803, the "attack reach C2-1" is executed.

In the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C021", the effect content of the "design variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 is "variation effect pattern C019". It is the same as the production content of "Design variation C3-1". The operation valid period X81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (h-3) of "attack reach C2-1", and "character q2 (samurai)" runs fast. The image display device 14 is controlled to display an effect image (not shown) having the content of attacking. The specific effect execution period W81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect C" as a special effect during the period (h-3) of the "attack reach C2-1". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C021" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). Execute any one of "decision effect C2". The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X82 as shown in FIG. 68B in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”.

Then, in the sub CPU 102a, during the period (h-4) of the "attack reach C2-1", the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first are displayed. ), The three special production symbols will be stopped in the same numerical value, and the production image will notify that "Character q2" has "destroyed" the enemy (not shown). Is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern C015 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern C015" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 61. The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern C021" shown in (b) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation C3-1" in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and in the period (h-3) from the timing T802, " Execute "Attack Reach C2-1". When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W81 is set while the "attack reach C2-1" is being executed, and the specific effect is executed.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C015" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (a). Execute any one of "decision effect C2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern C015", the sub CPU 102a does not execute either the "determined effect C1" or the "determined effect C2" of the "attack reach C1-1", the first decorative member 17A. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the "character q2" has "failed" in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern C023 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern C023" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 68 (c). ) Is executed from the timing T901 to the timing T903.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C023", and starts from the timing T902. The "attack reach C3-1" is executed in the period (i-3) and the period (i-4) up to the timing T903.

In the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C023", the effect content of the "symbol variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 is "variation effect pattern C019". It is the same as the production content of "Design variation C3-1".
That is, the sub CPU 102a has the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) of FIG. 68 (c) in the “design variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2). Is displayed.
The operation valid period X91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the operation valid period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (i-3) of "attack reach C3-1", and "character q3 (Ronin)" runs fast. The image display device 14 is controlled to display an effect image (not shown) having the content of attacking. The specific effect execution period W91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect C" as a special effect in the "attack reach C3-1". The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C023" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (b). Execute any one of "decision effect C2".
When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect C1" in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern C023", the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X92 as shown in FIG. 68 (c).

Then, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is stopped and displayed first during the period (i-4) of "attack reach C3-1". ), The three special production symbols will be stopped in the same numerical value, and the production image will notify that "Character q3" has "destroyed" the enemy (not shown). Is controlled to be displayed on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.
(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern C017 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern C017" is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is basically shown in FIG. 68. The same variation effect as the "variation effect pattern C023" shown in (c) is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation C3-1" in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902, and "is" in the period (i-3) from the timing T902. Execute "Attack Reach C3-1".

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect C1" as the "determination effect C" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect C" in the "variation effect pattern C017" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 48 (a). Execute any one of "decision effect C2".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern C017", the sub CPU 102a does not execute either the "determined effect C1" or the "determined effect C2" of the "attack reach C3-1", the first decorative member 17A. Is not operated from "standby position 1" to another position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols without having the same numerical value as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the "character q3" has "failed" in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the judgment result of the jackpot judgment is "missing".

Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a controls the effect so as to execute a variation effect having a rock-paper-scissors effect in which two characters perform "rock-paper-scissors" as the variation effect.

FIG. 70A is a diagram for explaining the time flow of the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019”. Further, FIG. 70B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022”. Further, FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D25”.

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern D019 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern D019" is selected in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a ), The effect control for executing the variable effect from the timing T1001 to the timing T1003 is performed.

FIG. 71 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 70A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, and a first decorative member 17A.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "design variation D1-1" in the period (j-1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002, and the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 to the timing T1003. The production control is performed so that "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (win)" is executed in the period (j-5).

The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of FIG. 71 (j-1) that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols during the period (j-1) of the “symbol variation D1-1”, and also during the period (j-2). , The effect control is performed so that the effect image of FIG. 71 (j-2) in which the characters "Let's win twice!" Is superimposed on the variable display of the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14.

During the period (j-3) of the "symbol variation D1-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. Along with the reach of whether or not to do it, the character "Character r1" of the ally and the character "Character u1" of the opponent perform the first round of Janken, (j-3-) in Fig. 71. The effect control for displaying the effect images of 1) or (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) on the image display device 14 is performed.

In the production of the reach fanning, the sub CPU 102a has "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-" as shown in the production images of (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) in FIG. 71. Execute "Development Notice D" to fuel the development to "1 (win)". The sub CPU 102a has "development notice D1" and "development notice D1" as "development notice D" according to the execution ratio of "development notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control to execute any one of "development notice D2".

When either "development notice D1" or "development notice D2" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which are the operation means, during the period (j-3). Set the operation validity period X101 to be valid.

The sub CPU 102a controls the player to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X101. In the operation valid period X101, if the "development notice D1", the sub CPU 102a has the effect button 18A in the projecting state (second state) as shown in (j-3-1) of FIG. 71, and the effect button in the projecting state. Control to execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to 18A, and if it is "development notice D2", the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the effect lever 19A as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Control to execute.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D1", the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state (second state) in the operation valid period X101, and is shown in FIG. 71 (j-3-1). As you can see, from the effect image of "Character r1" and "Character u1" saying "Janken" in the introduction part of Janken, the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the image of the timer gauge, and the characters "Press !!" The effect of displaying the effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D2", the "character r1" and the "character u1" are displayed in the operation valid period X101 as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Along with the production image of the appearance of "rock-paper-scissors" in the introduction part of the rock-paper-scissors, the image of the production lever 19A and the timer gauge and the production image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A consisting of the characters "close !!" The effect to be displayed on the display device 14 is executed.
The corresponding voice may be output from the voice output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D1", the sub CPU 102a is based on the fact that the effect button 18A in the protruding state is pressed once during the operation valid period X101, and the sub CPU 102a has a special effect symbol for the reach fanning effect. , And a production image having an effect image (effect d1 (blue)) on top of the production image in which "character r1" wins "character u1" in the first round of rock-paper-scissors ((j-3-3) in FIG. 65). )) Is displayed on the image display device 14, and the corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D2", the sub CPU 102a is tilted with respect to the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X101, and the special effect pattern of the reach fanning effect and the first round of the Janken In the image display device, an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 71) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) is superimposed on the effect image in which the “character r1” wins the “character u1”. A corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying on 14 is executed.

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W101 in the period (j-4) of "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W101, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state of FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state of FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

In the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (winning)" of the period (j-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1", the sub CPU 102a has two identical sub-CPU 102a as shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. When the numerical special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, "Character notice D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a has "character notice D1" to "character notice D" as "character notice D" according to the execution ratio of "character notice D" in the "variable effect pattern D019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Execute any of "Character notice D3".

The sub CPU 102a is an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4) regardless of which of "character advance notice D1" to "character advance notice D3" is executed as a special effect. The validity period Y101 is set. During the operation valid period X101, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation promotion notification prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, as shown in (j-4-1) and (j-4-2) of FIG. 71. Do not execute.

In the "character notice D1", as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a is pressed once with respect to the effect button 18A during the operation valid period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such that the support character "character d1" of the "character r1" is displayed on the image display device 14.

In the "character notice D2", the sub CPU 102a sets the "character d2", which is the support character of the "character r1", based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation validity period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on the image display device 14.

In the "character notice D3", the sub CPU 102a displays the image of the "character d3", which is the support character of the "character r1", based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation validity period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on 14.

Then, after executing this "character notice D", the sub CPU 102a "characters" as shown in (j-4-4), (j-4-5), and (j-4-6) of FIG. 71. The effect control is performed so that the image display device 14 displays an effect image in which "r1" and "character u1" perform the second round of rock-paper-scissors.

In the second round of rock-paper-scissors production, the sub CPU 102a executes "decision production D" as a special production as shown in the production images of (j-4-4) and (j-4-5) of FIG. 71.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D019" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D1" as a special effect, the operation valid period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid during the period (j-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (winning)". Set X102. Then, in the operation valid period X102, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a has "character r1" and "character u1" as "goo", "choki", and "par". In the production image of the state before issuing any of the above, the operation promotion for prompting the operation of the protruding production button 18A and the timer gauge and the character display of "press !!" The effect control is performed so that the notification image is displayed.

In the "decision effect D1", the sub CPU 102a is a "flash" that fuels the winning of the jackpot in the image display device 14 based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X102. The effect image of "d1" is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is placed at the lower position of the front surface of the image display device 14 from the "standby position 1" via the "operating position 1-1". The "decision effect" (corresponding effect) of the content such as moving to the operation position 1-2 "is executed.

Further, when the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D2" as a special effect, the operation of the effect lever 19A is enabled during the period (j-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (winning)". Set the validity period X102. Then, in the operation valid period X102, as shown in (j-4-5) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a has "character r1" and "character u1" as "goo", "choki", and "par". In the production image of the state before issuing any of the above, an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the production lever 19A, which consists of the production lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Close !!", is displayed. The production control is performed as follows.

In the "decision effect D2", the sub CPU 102a of the "flash d2" that fuels the winning of the jackpot in the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X102. An effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from the "standby position 1" to the "operating position 1-1", and is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, "operating position 1". Execute a "decision effect" (corresponding effect) such as moving to "-2".

Further, in the variation effect to be executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "second jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is changed from the "standby position 1" to the "operation position 1-1" in this "decision effect D". Only move to.
As described above, in the "decision effect D" of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the "first jackpot", the first decorative member 17A is placed below the "operation position 1-1". Since it is moved to the "moving position 1-2" of the above, the judgment result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than the "second jackpot" in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. It informs that the player has won the "first jackpot" to play the jackpot game.

After executing the "decision effect D" in the period (j-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (winning)", the sub CPU 102a performs the rock-paper-scissors 2 In the round round, after displaying the production image of how "Character r1" wins "Character u1" by issuing "Choki" and "Character u1" issuing "Par", the period (j) In -5), as shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 71, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is the same as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed first. The effect control is performed to display the effect image of (j-5) of FIG. 71 on the image display device 14, which stops the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern D010 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and the "variation effect pattern D010" is selected in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 70A. A variation effect substantially similar to the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern D019" shown is executed. That is, in the sub CPU 102a, the "design variation D1-1" in the period (j-1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002, that is, the "character r1" is the first round in the "character u1". It is controlled to execute "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (losing)" after executing the variable effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning in rock-paper-scissors. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (losing)", "character r1" is "character u1" as in the variable production of the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 of "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (winning)". And the reach production including the production to perform the second round of rock-paper-scissors.

The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decision effect D” as a special effect during the period (j-4) in the same manner as the “variation effect pattern D019” in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D010”.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D010" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (a). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "decision effect D1" and "determination effect D2" of the "variation effect pattern D010".

However, in the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern D010", the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D1" in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1 (losing)", and then shows it in FIG. 71 (J-1). In the second round of rock-paper-scissors, after displaying the production image of "Character r1" losing to "Character u1" by issuing "Choki" and "Character u1" issuing "Goo". As shown in the effect image (J-2) of FIG. 71, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. As a result, the effect control for displaying the effect image for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value is performed on the image display device 14. As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern D022 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern D022" is selected in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 70 (b). ) Is executed from the timing T1101 to the timing T1103.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation D2-1" in the period (k-1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, and the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 to the timing T1103 and the period (k-4). Execute "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (win)" in the period (k-5).

In the "symbol variation D2-1", the sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as in the "symbol variation D1-1". That is, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (k-1). Then, during the period (k-2) of "design variation D2-1", an image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) in which the characters "Let's win 3 times of rock-paper-scissors !!" is superimposed on the variation display of the special production symbol is displayed. The effect control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

During the period (k-3) of the "symbol variation D2-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. An image of a production image (not shown) in which the ally character "Character r1" and the opponent character "Character u1" perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, along with the reach of whether or not to do it. The effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D" that fuels the development to "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (winning)" in the production of the reach fanning. The sub CPU 102a has "development notice D1" and "development notice D1" as "development notice D" according to the execution ratio of "development notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D022" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control to execute any one of "development notice D2".

The sub CPU 102a is an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, during the period (k-3) regardless of whether the "development notice D1" or the "development notice D2" is executed as a special effect. Set the validity period X111.

The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (winning)" during the period (k-4) of "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1". Then, "Character notice D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a has "character notice D1" to "character notice D" as "character notice D" according to the execution ratio of "character notice D" in the "variable effect pattern D022" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Execute any of "Character notice D3".

When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W111 for executing the specific effect in the period (k-4). Then, in the specific effect execution period W111, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 72 (b), and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. Further, when outputting an image, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the effect image of the vibrating effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14. Further, in the case of sound output, as shown in FIG. 72 (c), the sound output device 15 outputs a simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A.

Regardless of which of "Character notice D1" to "Character notice D3" is executed as a special effect, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period Y111 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (k-4). Set.

In "Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)", the sub CPU 102a executes "Character Notice D", and then "Character r1" and "Character u1" perform the second and third rounds of Rock-paper-scissors, and "Character". The effect control is performed so that the image display device 14 displays an effect image in which "r1" continuously wins the "character u1".

Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D" in the effect of the third round of rock-paper-scissors in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D022" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed.

The sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X112 that enables the operation of the effect button 18A during the period of producing the third round of rock-paper-scissors in the latter half of the period (k-4) of this "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (win)". Set. In the sub CPU 102a, during the operation validity period X112 of the "decision effect D1", before "character r1" and "character u1" issue any of "goo", "choki", and "par" in the third round of rock-paper-scissors. In the effect image of the state of the above, an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is displayed, which consists of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Let's press!". The production control is performed as follows. Further, in the sub CPU 102a, during the operation validity period X112 of the "decision effect D2", the "character r1" and the "character u1" are either "goo", "choki", or "par" in the third round of rock-paper-scissors. The effect control is to display the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, which consists of the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Let's pull!" I do.

The sub CPU 102a is a production in which "character r1" wins "character u1" in the third round of rock-paper-scissors after executing "decision production D" during the period (k-4) of "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (winning)". After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing during the period (k-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed earlier. The effect control is performed to display the effect image of stopping the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value (777) on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern D013 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern D013" is selected in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 70 (b). A variation effect substantially similar to the variation effect of the "variation effect pattern D022" shown is executed. That is, in the sub CPU 102a, the "design variation D2-1" in the period (k-1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, that is, the "character r1" is the first round of the "character u1". It is controlled to execute "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (losing)" after executing the variable effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning in rock-paper-scissors. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (losing)", "character r1" is "character u1" as in the variable production of the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 of "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (winning)". In the second and third rounds of rock-paper-scissors, "Character r1" wins "Character u1" in the second round of rock-paper-scissors, and "Character r1" loses to "Character u1" in the third round of rock-paper-scissors. Perform reach production.

In the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern D013", the sub CPU 102a also executes the specific effect when executing the specific effect during the period (k-4) as in the "variable effect pattern D022", and also performs the special effect. As a result, "decision effect D" is executed.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D013" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (a). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the "decision effect D1" and "determination effect D2" of the "variation effect pattern D013".

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern D013", the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D1" in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1 (losing)", and then the "character r1" becomes "character r1" in the third round of rock-paper-scissors. After displaying the effect image of losing to "Character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed first. Then, the effect control is performed to display the effect image on the image display device 14 for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

(Variable effect related to variable effect pattern D025 (1st jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is "first jackpot" and "variation effect pattern D025" is selected in the 75th to 84th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is shown in FIG. 70 (c). ) Is executed from the timing T1201 to the timing T1203.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "design variation D3-1" in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, and the period (l-4) from the timing T1202 to the timing T1203 and Perform "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (win)" in the period (l-5).

In the "symbol variation D3-1", the sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as in the "symbol variation D1-1". That is, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (l-1). Then, during the period (l-2) of "design variation D3-1", an image (not shown) of the effect image (not shown) in which the characters "Let's win 4 times of rock-paper-scissors !!" is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is displayed. The effect control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

During the period (l-3) of the "symbol variation D3-1", the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) from which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. An image of a production image (not shown) in which the ally character "Character r1" and the opponent character "Character u1" perform the first round of rock-paper-scissors, along with the reach of whether or not to do it. The effect control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

The sub CPU 102a executes the "development notice D" that fuels the development to "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)" in the production of the reach fanning. The sub CPU 102a has "development notice D1" and "development notice D1" as "development notice D" according to the execution ratio of "development notice D" in the "variation effect pattern D025" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Control to execute any one of "development notice D2".

The sub CPU 102a is an operation that enables the operation of the effect button 18A, which is an operation means, during the period (l-3) regardless of whether the "development notice D1" or the "development notice D2" is executed as a special effect. Set the validity period X121.

In the "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)" of the period (l-4) of the "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1", the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 when executing the specific effect, and is shown in FIG. 54. -The specific effect determined with reference to FIG. 59 is executed.

The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special production symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)" during the period (l-4) of "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1". Then, "Character notice D" is executed. The sub CPU 102a has "character notice D1" to "character notice D" as "character notice D" according to the execution ratio of "character notice D" in the "variable effect pattern D025" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). Execute any of "Character notice D3".

The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period Y121 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid in the period (l-4) regardless of which of "character advance notice D1" to "character advance notice D3" is executed as a special effect. Set.

In "Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)", the sub CPU 102a executes "Character Notice D", and then "Character r1" and "Character u1" perform the second to fourth rounds of Janken, and "Character". The effect control is performed so that the image display device 14 displays an effect image in which "r1" continuously wins the "character u1".

Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D" in the effect of the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors in the latter half of the period (l-4). The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D025" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (b). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed.

When the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D1" as a special effect, in the period of performing the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors in the latter half of the period (l-4) of this "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)". The operation valid period X122 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A is set. In the sub CPU 102a, during the operation validity period X122 of the "decision effect D1", before "character r1" and "character u1" issue any of "goo", "choki", and "par" in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors. In the effect image of the state of the above, an image of an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the protruding state is displayed, which consists of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Let's press!". The production control is performed as follows.

Further, in the sub CPU 102a, in the operation valid period X122 of the "decision effect D2", "character r1" and "character u1" are any of "goo", "choki", and "par" in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors. In the production image of the state before putting out the button, an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the production lever 19A, which consists of the production lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of "Let's pull!", Is displayed. Perform production control.

The sub CPU 102a is a production in which "character r1" wins "character u1" in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors after executing "decision production D" during the period (l-4) of "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)". After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing during the period (l-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed earlier. The effect control is performed to display the effect image of stopping the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value (777) on the image display device 14.
As a result, the player is notified that the jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of rounds is 16R (round) has been won in the first jackpot.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern D016 (loss))
When the judgment result of the jackpot is "missing" and "variation effect pattern D016" is selected in the 75th to 84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the high-time-short gaming state, the sub CPU 102a is set to "variation effect pattern D025". A variable effect similar to that of is executed. That is, in the sub CPU 102a, the "design variation D3-1" in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, that is, the "character r1" is the first round in the "character u1". It is controlled to execute "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (losing)" after executing the variable effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning in rock-paper-scissors. In this "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (losing)", "character r1" is "character u1" as in the variable production of the period (l-4) from the timing T1202 of "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (winning)". And rock-paper-scissors perform reach production including the production to perform the 2nd to 4th rounds.

When the sub CPU 102a also executes the specific effect in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern D016", the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 in the period (l-4) in the same manner as in the "variable effect pattern D025". The specific effect determined with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59 is executed.

The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decision effect D” as a special effect during the period (l-4) in the same manner as the “variation effect pattern D025” in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D016”.

The sub CPU 102a sets the "decision effect D1" as the "determination effect D" according to the execution ratio of the "determination effect D" in the "variation effect pattern D016" set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 50 (a). One of the "decision effect D2" is executed.

However, in the variable effect of the "variable effect pattern D016", the sub CPU 102a executes the "decision effect D1" in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1 (losing)", and then the "character r1" becomes "character r1" in the fourth round of rock-paper-scissors. After displaying the effect image of losing to "Character u1", the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were stopped and displayed first. Then, the effect control is performed to display the effect image on the image display device 14 for stopping the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. As a result, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is "missing".

As described above, in the variable effect of the effect modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a keeps the effect button 18A in a non-protruding state (first) during the operation valid period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A is performed. State) or protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a keeps the effect button 18A in the non-protruding state (first state) while the sub CPU 102a is in the non-protruding state (first state) during the operation valid period in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the effect button 18A is not performed, while the sub CPU 102a is in the projecting state (second state). (State) is not set.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y executes the variable effects of the effect modes B to D in the specific game state (high-probability game state and time-saving game state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the effect mode B The fluctuation effect of the effect mode C (31st to 74th variation) sets the operation valid period during the variation effect at a higher rate than the variation effect of (1st to 30th variation), and the variation of the effect mode C. The variable effect of the effect mode D (75th to 84th variation) sets the operation valid period during the variable effect at a higher rate than the effect.

(Specific example of display result of each display)
Here, using FIG. 73, the first special symbol 1st display 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the 1st special symbol 2nd display 88, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 89, the second 1 A specific example of a display result that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 will be described.

First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived on each display will be described.

In the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the right ends of the 6 LEDs arranged in the left-right direction, which are the special symbol display areas when the power is turned on (RAM clear), are lit (loss special symbol). The initial special symbol in the same mode as the above is displayed), and the special symbol is variablely displayed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is repeatedly moved one by one in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED to the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. The loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 60 is until the next variable display is started on the 1st special symbol 1st display 60 (2nd special symbol 1st). While the variable display on the display 61 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display 61 is Next, until the variation display is started on the second special symbol 1st display 61 (during the execution of the variation display on the 1st special symbol 1st display 60 or during the execution of the jackpot game), the display remains stopped. It is designed to maintain the state of.

In the first special symbol 2nd display 88 and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 89, one LED that becomes the 4th symbol display area is turned off when the power is turned on (RAM clear) (the same mode as the lost 4th symbol). The initial fourth symbol is displayed), and the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, one LED is turned off and turned on repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or turned on, and the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. The LED lighting cycle may be earlier than the LED lighting cycle (0.25 seconds) of the special symbol first display.

Then, the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot 4th symbol stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 88 is until the next variable display is started on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 88 (2nd special symbol). While the variable display on the 2nd display 89 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state in which the stop display remains is maintained, and the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot that is stopped and displayed on the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 89. The fourth symbol is stopped until the second special symbol second display 89 starts the variable display (the first special symbol second display 88 is executing the variable display or the jackpot game is being executed). It is designed to maintain the state as it is displayed.

In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), three effect symbols (lost effect symbols and jackpot effect symbols) that are predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left side area, center area, right side area) are different from the initial effect symbols. ) Is displayed, and the variation display of the effect symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols are scrolled up and down, and finally the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is until the next variable display is started, the customer waiting effect is executed, or the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the effect symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed. The initial effect symbol may have the same aspect as the lost effect symbol.

Further, in the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one special symbol (initial special symbol having the same mode as the lost special symbol) is displayed in the special symbol display area, which is special. The variable display of the special symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variable display of the symbol. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is until the next variable display is started, the customer waiting effect is executed, or the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed.

As described above, the size of the fourth symbol display area arranged inside the game area 2A is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol second indicator is smaller than the special symbol first indicator). Since the number of LEDs is smaller in the above), the area inside the game area 2A is not extremely narrowed. In addition, since the size of the special symbol display area is larger than that of the fourth symbol display area (the number of LEDs in the special symbol first display is larger than that in the special symbol second display), it is suitable for the player. On the other hand, it becomes easy to accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, a specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed on each display as a result of the variable display will be described.

On the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, one of the display results indicating one type of lost special symbol and the display result indicating 22 types of jackpot special symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the loss special symbol, one LED at the right end is turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear). That is, the display result showing the lost special symbol of the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the display result showing the lost special symbol of the second special symbol 1st display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, 2 to 5 LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.

As a result of the special symbol determination, the game is different from the jackpot game (the jackpot 8 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than that of the jackpot game, and the game state is changed. When the small hit game is enabled, the display result showing the small hit special symbol on the special symbol 1st indicators 60 and 61 shows the display result showing the lost special symbol and the display result showing the big hit special symbol. The display result should be different from that of. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

In the special symbol second display, one of the display result indicating one type of lost fourth symbol and the display result indicating one type of jackpot fourth symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost fourth symbol, one LED is turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot fourth symbol, one LED is lit.

When the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, the display result showing the small hit 4 symbol on the special symbol 2 display shows the display result showing the lost 4 symbol and the big hit 4 symbol. It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit 4th symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit 4th symbol is also displayed. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of small hit game.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of the display results showing 23 or more types of lost effect symbols and the display result showing 10 types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost effect symbol, the combination of the three effect symbols (separate stitches) in which the three effect symbols are not the same and has no regularity is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot effect symbol, the combination of the same three effect symbols (9 types of 111 to 999) is stopped.

When the small hit game described above can be executed, the display result showing the small hit effect symbol on the image display device 14 is different from the display result showing the loss effect symbol and the display result showing the big hit effect symbol. The display result may be the same as the display result showing a predetermined jackpot effect symbol. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit effect symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit effect symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

In the special symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of the display results showing one type of lost special symbol and the display result showing one kind of jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost special symbol, the “x” symbol is stopped as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, the "○" symbol is in a stopped state.
When the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, the display result showing the small hit special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display device 14 shows the display result showing the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol. It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

As explained above, while there are multiple types of display results that show the special jackpot symbol, there is only one type of display result that shows the special loss symbol, so if you remember only the display result that shows the special loss symbol, you will get a big hit. It becomes possible to easily determine whether the result is a loss or a loss. If the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol is smaller than the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol, the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol may be two or more.

In addition, while the display result showing the lost special symbol lights up only one LED, the display result showing the jackpot special symbol lights up two or more LEDs, so it is easy to determine whether the jackpot is a big hit or a loss. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, since there are multiple types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each jackpot special symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game is to be executed, and which type of jackpot game is to be executed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the LED.

In addition, when the display result indicating the lost special symbol is derived and displayed, an LED different from the LED that lights at the start of fluctuation is lit, so that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed even when the fluctuation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize that it has been damaged.

Further, when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED different from the LED that is lit at the start of fluctuation is lit, so that the special symbol is lit even when the fluctuation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing the 4th jackpot symbol and display results showing the special jackpot symbol than the types of display results showing the jackpot special symbol, by checking the 4th symbol and the special symbol, It is possible to instantly determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. It should be noted that the number of types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be smaller than the type of display result indicating the jackpot fourth symbol or the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol.

Also, since there are fewer types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol than the types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol, there are fewer types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol, so check the effect symbols. Makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. It should be noted that the number of types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be smaller than the type of display result indicating the jackpot effect symbol.

In addition, since the size of the display result indicating the special loss symbol and the size of the display result indicating the fourth loss symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it becomes easy to grasp the correspondence between the two. , It becomes easy to recognize that it is a loss.

In addition, since the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes the LED that lights up in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, the loss special result is shown when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived. It is possible to reduce the bad impression on the display result.

In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot game, the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes the LED that lights up in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, so that the loss special result is obtained. It is possible to further reduce the bad impression on the display result indicating.

In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, there is no state in which all the LEDs are turned off or a state in which a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and one LED is always turned on. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display is in progress.

In addition, a plurality of types of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side) that are not finally stopped and displayed except for the display result indicating the lost special symbol during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61. Since the mode in which the second one LED is lit appears (displayed), it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is in progress.

(Display example of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
74 to 79 are views showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Specifically, FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-time-saving game state, and FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the reach effect performed in the time-saving game state (SP reach effect). FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a display example during the SP reach effect), FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a display example during the blackout effect and during the movement effect by the movable effect member, and FIGS. 77 to 78 are during the jackpot game. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display example, and FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display example when a power failure occurs.

First, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIGS. 74 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes of a production example using a specific music preview pattern. FIG. 74 (a) is a main predictive effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs variable display of the first special symbol that lights the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol hold first display 63. Indicates that two LEDs are turned on and two first holds are stored.
Further, the second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st. The display 64 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal symbol hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is held. The 2 display 83 lights two LEDs to indicate that two first holds are stored.
Further, the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 89 and the normal symbol 2nd indicator 82 turn off the LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the ordinary symbol are stopped, and the 2nd special symbol hold 2nd indicator 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal symbol hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode is displayed in the first display units 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed in the second display unit. The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the variable icon display area 70D, and "2" indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. .. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

Then, FIG. 74 (b) is a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the first special symbol has been continuously changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 59. In 79, the same display as in FIG. 74 (a) is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the display of the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D. Is erased, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect).
The number of holds (first hold, second hold) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 74 (a).

Then, FIG. 74 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is going.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal symbol hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, and the 2nd special symbol hold The first display 64, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 turns off the LED in response to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a loss. There is.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal symbol hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd indicator 83, the 2nd special symbol 2nd indicator 89, and the 2nd special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second display 90, and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the fluctuations that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect). The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display unit. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the fluctuation has ended. Further, "2" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1. Further, the effect symbol and the first special symbol display area DZ1 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As described above, in the variation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time saving game state, the variation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. , 61, the special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the effect symbol and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14). Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variable display of the special symbol.
Further, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed by the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold first of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 88, 89, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).

On the other hand, in the reach effect (SP reach effect), in order to draw attention to the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 , The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. The first display 63, 64, the special symbol holding of the second game information display device 79, the second display 88, 89, and the holding number display area (first holding number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) are displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

In addition, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during a normal gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Is reduced and displayed, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 88, 89, and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2 Since the size of the special symbol displayed in is maintained without being reduced, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the effect symbol is lost. It becomes.

In the first special symbol hold second display 88 and the second special symbol hold second display 89, the hold change notice that changes the display mode is not executed, so that the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the first special symbol hold 1st display 63 and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so that the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, since the hold change notice that changes the display mode is not executed, the display indicating the hold number is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon on which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the icon display area composed of the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, the first hold corresponds to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the first hold icon or the second hold icon moves (shifts) to the variable icon display area 70D, so that the hold decrease effect displayed as the variable icon (the number of holds decreases). (Specific effect suggesting that this has been done) is executed, but in the hold number display area composed of the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold corresponds to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the hold decrease effect as described above is not performed and the number is only subtracted. Therefore, by checking the hold number display area, it becomes easy to grasp the pure hold number itself. It should be noted that displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

Even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of holds (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) of the hold number display area 14 of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (the first). The display of 1 hold number and 2 hold number was displayed without being erased, but the hold number display area (1st hold number display area SH1 and 2 hold number display area SH2) was held (1st hold). The display of the number and the second hold number) may also be deleted. Further, in the SP reach effect of FIG. 75 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 76 (a), the movement effect of FIG. 76 (b), and the SPSP reach effect, which will be described later, the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1) is similarly obtained. , The display of the number of holds (the number of first hold, the number of second hold) in the second hold number display area SH2) may also be deleted.
In this way, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , Second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) Hold icon display and hold number Display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) hold number (first hold number, second hold) Even if the display of the number) is deleted, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79. Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (first hold number and second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the time-saving game state. is there.

FIG. 75A is a variable effect before the reach effect (SP reach effect) is achieved in the time-saving game state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs variable display of the second special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the second special symbol hold first display 64. Indicates that two LEDs are lit and two second holds are stored. Further, the normal symbol first display 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The first special symbol 1st display 60 is turned on to indicate that the 1st special symbol is stopped, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 are shown. Turns off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (first hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs a variation display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold second. The display 84 lights two LEDs to indicate that two second holds are stored. Further, the normal symbol second display 90 performs a variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order in response to the variable display of the normal symbol. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in the time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The 1st special symbol 2nd indicator 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the 1st special symbol is stopped, and the 1st special symbol holding 2nd indicator 83 and the normal symbol holding 2nd indicator 85 indicate that the LED is stopped. All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variablely displayed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed in the first display units 70C1 and the second display units 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 70D. 2 In the hold number display area SH2, “2” indicating the second hold number is displayed. Further, since the game is being played for a short time, the image G10 “Right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state”) is displayed is displayed. ing.

FIG. 75 (b) is a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the second special symbol is continuously changed, the second special symbol first display 61 is performing the variation display in the same manner as in FIG. 75 (a). .. Then, since one new second hold is generated and the number of second holds is three, the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks the LED on the left side and lights the LED on the right side. It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new normal figure reservations have been generated, and the number of normal figure reservations has become two. Therefore, the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 lights two LEDs, and two normal figure reservations are stored. It shows that it is.
Since the first hold has not been newly generated, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 remains off.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 75 (a). Then, since one new second hold is generated and the number of second holds is three, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks the LED on the left side and lights the LED on the right side. It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new normal figure reservations have been generated, and the number of normal figure reservations has become two. Therefore, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights two LEDs, and two normal figure reservations are stored. It shows that it is.
Since the first hold has not been newly generated, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 remains off.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. Further, the display of the hold icon in the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left. Therefore, the reach production (SP reach production) is not hindered. In addition, the number of holds (first number of holds, second number of holds) and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 75 (a). Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is in progress is displayed.

Then, FIG. 75 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is going.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal symbol hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60, the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63, and the 2nd special symbol hold The first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 display the same as in FIG. 75 (b). In addition, the right-handed first indicator 67 remains lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 89 turns off the LED in response to the stop display of the second special symbol, indicating that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a loss. There is.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal symbol hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol 2nd indicator 88, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd indicator 83, and the 2nd special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 perform the same display as in FIG. 75 (b). In addition, the right-handed second indicator 87 remains lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol. There is. In addition, the displays of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, which were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect), are displayed again, and the second hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4 is displayed. 2 The hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the fluctuation has ended. Further, "3" indicating the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area SH2.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information (“sorry”) indicating that the image is lost.

As described above, in the variation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the time-saving game state, the variation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. 61, special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the effect symbol and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, first) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed in the 2 special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variable display of the special symbol.
Further, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed by the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold first of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 88, 89, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
The right-handed display is the right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 "Right-handed → →" display is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to understand.

On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display areas (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. The special symbol holding second displays 88 and 89 of the display device 79 and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1 and second holding number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Since it is displayed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

In addition, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the time-saving game state, the effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Is displayed in a reduced size, but is displayed in the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 88, 89, and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. Since the size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, even if the effect symbol is lost, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display. ..

Further, the hold icons of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. As an effect of erasing the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, but the effect is not limited to the SP reach effect.

For example, during the fluctuation effect as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the displays of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly go dark and shift to a specific advance notice effect. During the effect (so-called blackout effect) that develops into a reach effect, the first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 The display of the hold icon and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed as the special symbol hold number of the first game information display device 59. 1 Display 63, 64, special symbol reservation of the second game information display device 79 Second display 88, 89, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 hold number display area (first hold number display area) It is displayed in SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the blackout effect from being hindered.

Further, when a moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the variable effect, the first hold on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when the movable effect member 73 is moved as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D is erased, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). ) Are displayed by the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second indicators 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device ( (Main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

Further, although not shown, in the SPSP reach effect, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is used in the same manner as in FIGS. 74 (b), 75 (c), and 76 (a) and (b). 1 The display of the hold icon in the hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number, second) The display of the number of holds) is displayed by the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second indicators 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display. The display is performed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of the device (main liquid crystal) 14.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.

Next, FIGS. 77 to 78 will be described.
77 to 78 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during the jackpot game.

FIG. 77 (a) is the first round game production of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 turns on the LED in a stop mode indicating a probability variation jackpot, stops the first special symbol, and the round number display 66 displays. The LED is turned on in a manner indicating the number of rounds (8 rounds) of the probability variation jackpot 2 to indicate that the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time is 8 times, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63 has 2 LEDs. It blinks to indicate that four first holds are stored. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the big hit game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold 1st display 64 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 turns on the LED to display a stop indicating that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second display 83 sets the LED to 2. It blinks once to indicate that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol 2nd display 89 and the normal symbol 2nd display 90 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal symbol hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold that were displayed before the start of the jackpot game are performed. The display of the hold icon in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variable icon in the variable icon display area 70D is deleted. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, a stop display indicating a jackpot of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the jackpot game is in progress, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2, and the second special symbol has not changed, so that the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being performed is displayed.

Then, FIG. 77 (b) is a promotion effect performed from the first opening of the large winning opening 8 of the fifth round game to the fourth closing. Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the normal figure hold is newly generated, the normal symbol hold first display 65 blinks four LEDs, and four normal figure hold are stored. As shown, the normal symbol first display 62 performs a variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 continue to display the same display as in FIG. 77 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol holding second display 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four normal symbol holdings are stored, and the normal symbol second display 90 is predetermined. The variation display of the normal symbol that blinks the LED in the order of. The displays other than the normal symbol second display 90 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continue to display the same display as in FIG. 77 (a).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed. Here, the image G10 “right-handed →→” display that was displayed before the promotion effect is deleted is deleted.
The number of holds (first hold, second hold) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed. Further, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (hidden).

Then, FIG. 77 (c) shows the movement effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 continuously display the same display as in FIG. 77 (b).

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Further, as in FIG. 77 (b), the image G10 “right-handed →→” display remains erased, and the special symbol in the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2) remains erased. (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 72 (b). On the other hand, the display position of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and FIG. 77 (c) ), It is displayed below the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2).

In this way, the number of holds (first number of holds, first hold number, SH2) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is produced by the effect performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. By changing the display position of the second hold number), the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) are displayed on each other (the second hold number). It prevents the production) from being hindered.

Then, FIG. 78A is an effect performed from the fifth opening of the grand prize opening 8 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 77 (c) is performed.

The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect of notifying (notifying) that the jackpot game will be continuously performed even after the fifth round game using the character image. In addition, the image G10 “right-handed →→” display, which was not displayed during the promotion effect, is displayed again.
The number of holds (first hold, second hold) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (hidden).

FIG. 78 (b) is the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 79A is performed.

On the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1). , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) and the image G10 "right-handed →→" display are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 78 (a). There is. In addition, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended.

Then, FIG. 78 (c) is an effect showing that the jackpot game has ended and the game has shifted to the time-saving game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot ends. In the first game information display device 59, the same display as in FIG. 78 (b) is performed except for the round number display 66. Further, the second game information display device 79 is also displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, which were not displayed during the jackpot game, The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. There is. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, in the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2), since the first special symbol and the second special symbol have not changed, stop display is performed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state”) is displayed is displayed. To.

As described above, during the jackpot game, the hold icon in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) in order to pay attention to the jackpot game effect, the variation thereof. Although the display of the variable icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed by the special symbol hold first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. , 64, the special symbol holding second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
The right-handed display is the right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 "Right-handed → →" is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to understand.

Further, even during the jackpot game, the image G10 "right-handed →→" display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is erased during the promotion effect, but the right-handed display is the first game information display. Since the display is displayed by the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

In the right-handed display, the LED of the right-handed first display 67, which is not marked with anything, is lit, the LED of the right-handed second display 87, which is marked as "right-handed", is lit, and the first. The image G10 “right-handed → →” of the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed. That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is such that the right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67, and further, the right-handed second display 87 is used. The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. Further, the right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 than the right-handed first display 67, and is also right-handed in that the position is easy for the player to see. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 79 will be described.
FIG. 79 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when a power failure occurs.

FIG. 79 (a) is a variable effect before the reach effect is achieved in the normal gaming state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs variable display of the first special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol hold first display 63. Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold 1st display 64 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is held. The 2 display 83 blinks 4 LEDs, indicating that 4 first holds are stored.
The second special symbol 2nd indicator 81 and the normal symbol 2nd indicator 82 turn off the LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the ordinary symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal symbol hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the first special symbol of the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the variable icon display is performed. The variable icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

Then, since a power failure occurred and the power supply voltage was cut off, nothing was found in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. It is not displayed (Fig. 79 (b)).

After that, when the power is restored from the power failure, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 101a displays all the displays (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first display 62, special symbol hold) based on the backup data. Restored 1st display 63, 64, normal symbol hold 1st display 65, round number display 66, right-handed 1st display 67, high-probability game state display 68, and time-saving game state display 69). However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 102a is based on the special symbol hold storage designation command and the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery, and the special symbol hold second display 83, The display of 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 is restored. On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, a power restoration effect for notifying that the image control board 105 is in the process of power restoration based on the reception of the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of restoration is performed. Do.

Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image control board 105 displays the hold number display area (first) on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 based on the special symbol hold storage designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of restoration. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) of the hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2 is restarted (recovered) (FIG. 79 (d)).

As described above, when a power failure occurs and recovery occurs, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed as the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and then the hold number display area (first hold) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) of the number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) is restored and displayed. That is, when the power is restored, the number of holdings on the second game information display device 79 is larger than the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. The display of (first hold number, second hold number) will be displayed (recovered) first.

In this way, by restoring the display of the number of holds (the number of first hold, the number of second hold) on the second game information display device 79 before the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed. The player can grasp the first hold number and the second hold number).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of reserved special symbols is usually displayed by the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding number of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 83, 84, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. It is displayed in four places, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), but during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and a jackpot effect. If it is inside, the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second indicators 83 and 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device. (Main liquid crystal) It is displayed in three places of 14 holding number display areas (first holding number display area SH1 and second holding number display area SH2). Further, after the restoration after the power failure, the special symbol holding first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding second indicators 83 and 84 of the second game information display device 79 are used. It is displayed in two places.
That is, the display of the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed in two places, three places, or four places depending on the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are more than the LEDs of the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 and the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84. Is large and is displayed at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine, making it easier for the player to see, but it is a special symbol than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there. Even if the LEDs of the holding 1st display 63 and 64 and the special symbol holding 2nd display 83 and 84 are enlarged or placed near the center of the gaming machine to make it easier for the player to see. Good.

In FIGS. 73 to 79, the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed therein are larger than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed therein. Although it is easy to see, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there. It may be easy.

(Structure of 1st Game Information Display Device 59 and 2nd Game Information Display Device 79)
FIG. 80 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is arranged adjacent to the outer rail member 29C at the lower left of the game area 2A, but is not limited to this, and may be arranged at various positions. Can be done.

The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information on special symbol determination and ordinary symbol determination (in other words, information on profits given to the player in the game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, and round number indicator 66. It can be configured as a right-handed first display 67, a high-probability game state display 68, a time-saving game state display 69, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first display 65.

Further, the second game information display device 79 also displays information on the profit given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbols second display 88, 89, and the second 1. It can be configured as a second special symbol holding second display 83, 84, a right-handed second display 87, a normal symbol second display 82, and a normal symbol holding second display 85.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 80, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 include the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability game state indicator 68, and the time-saving game state indicator 69. , Right-handed first indicator 67, round number indicator 66, ordinary symbol first indicator 62, and ordinary symbol hold first indicator 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch ball guide path of the game ball formed by the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C (see FIG. 1). The arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and each LED 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch ball guide path of the game ball, or may be arranged in three or more rows. , It may be arranged regardless of the launch ball guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display board 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted, and a first cover that covers at least the front side of the first display board 4200. A member 4202 and a protective member 4204 that covers the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204. In the first game information display device 59, the first display board 4200 arranged between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is installed in an upright posture along the board surface of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 is configured by the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 so that the first display board 4200 is difficult or inaccessible from the outside. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member by fitting it into a mounting opening (not shown) formed in the plate member constituting the game board 2, and the front surface faces the front side of the game board 2 to play a game. The light of the LED 4045 is visible to the person. Further, in the first game information display device 59, the back side of the first game information display device 59 faces the back side of the game board 2 (plate member), and the game board 2 has a connector 4100 (FIG. 81) provided so as to face the back side. It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protective member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 to the game board 2 by screwing, adhesion, or other methods. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble with respect to the game board 2 due to adhesion or the like, or when it is removed from the game board 2, the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 It may be attached in a configuration in which a trace remains on either side. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 is such that the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59. 1 A configuration in which the game information display device 59 cannot be reassembled due to destruction or deformation, or a game board 2 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed due to removal. The second or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one configuration in which a trace of removal remains.

As shown in FIG. 85, the first display board 4200 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs 4045 on the front surface facing the player, and can irradiate light from each LED 4045 toward the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is surface-mounted on the first display board 4200, not through-hole mounting in which the leads of the LED 4045 are fixed to holes in the printed circuit board. In the first display board 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display board 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude from the rear surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not arranged on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged side by side in two rows above and below in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED 4045, either a chip type or a bullet type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but the chip type is preferable because of the advantage that the space can be reduced. In the first display board 4200, states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs 4045 are controlled under the control of the control means of the main control board 101, and states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking, and combinations and states thereof. Information on the profits given to the player due to changes or the like is displayed.

By surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the first display board 4200 in this way, the arrangement space of the LED 4045 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display board 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 82) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. You may. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front region on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front region. An absorption unit may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be efficiently used. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the absorbing unit is diffused on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element. It can be prevented from doing so.

FIG. 85 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 as viewed from the front surface side. The first special symbol first display 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol first display 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol reservation first display 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, and is composed of the second special symbol. The hold first display 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. On the right side of the second special symbol hold first display 64, the high-probability game state display 68, the time-saving game state display 69, and the right-handed first display 67 are arranged one by one in this order. They are arranged side by side. Further, the round number indicator 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, and the normal symbol first display 62 is composed of three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number indicator 66. 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the right side in the lower row. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 86, the first display board 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and is provided via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. , The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 101 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack to which a plug provided at the end of the harness can be attached and detached, and may have either a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be mounted through a hole in which the leads of the connector 4100 are fixed to holes in the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment, the connector 4100 is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display board 4200. Further, in the connector 4100, the connector opening into which the plug provided at the end of the harness is inserted is opened toward the rear in FIG. 86. As described above, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display board 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 is not arranged on the front surface. By surface-mounting the connector 4100 on the first display board 4200 in this way, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.

The connector 4100 is arranged on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 at a position corresponding to a mounting area of a plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap each other with the first display board 4200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces. By surface-mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 in this way, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, the connector 4100 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used to make the first display substrate 4200 more compact.

As shown in FIG. 86, a chip-type resistor 4500 as a current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display board 4200, and in the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are located at positions where they do not overlap with the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. Further, the resistor 4500 may be mounted through a hole in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to a hole in the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment, the resistor 4500 is surface-mounted on the first display board 4200. The first display board 4200 has a resistor 4500 and solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display board 4200 on the same rear surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not arranged on the front surface. In this embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged side by side in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 88, the resistor 4500 is arranged between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display board 4200, and limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. This prevents an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045.

By mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200 in this way, even if the resistor 4500 fails, it can be dealt with by replacing the first game information display device 59, and maintenance can be performed. It will be easier. Since the first game information display device 59 can be easily replaced, it is possible to shorten the pause period of the game and avoid spoiling the interest of the game. Further, by surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. it can.

The resistor 4500 may be arranged at a position corresponding to a mounting area of a plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display board 4200 on the rear surface of the first display board 4200. In this case, the mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting areas of the plurality of resistors 4500 may be in a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched in the front-rear direction and all overlap or partially overlap. By surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 in this way, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, the resistor 4500 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used to make the first display substrate 4200 more compact. The mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting areas of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap with the first display board 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 in which a window 4206 corresponding to each of the LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 is formed, and a front cover portion. A lateral cover portion 4210 formed so as to stand up to the rear side is provided on the peripheral edge of the 4208. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape that opens rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210, and is used for the first display in the inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210. The board 4200 can be stored. Then, when the first display board 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display board 4200 is on the front cover portion 4208 side (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210 rather than the open end (rear end). Located on the front side), the entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display board 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display board 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. 1 The presence of the cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment has an inner region formed in accordance with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

In this way, since the first display board 4200 is arranged in the state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the front side or the side side, and the first display board 4200 is used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the substrate 4200. Further, even if the first display board 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display board 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, in the first cover member 4202, a window 4206 that penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 is formed by a window drawing portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. It is defined. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle or a circular shape, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the entire corresponding one or a plurality of LED 4045s can be inserted inside. In the first cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed so as to be arranged in two rows. When the first cover member 4202 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 has each LED 4045. It is arranged at a position corresponding to, and the state such as lighting of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction and partitions the window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, so that the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be determined. Each window 4206 has a window drawing portion 4212 that is configured to be distinguishable. The window drawing portion 4212 has a structure formed in a tubular shape protruding rearward from the front cover portion 4208 (the present embodiment), and a portion of the front cover portion 4208 corresponding to the front side of the mounting area of the LED 4045 is formed thickly. It is provided depending on the configuration and the like. When the window image forming portion 4212 is formed of a tubular body, the window image forming portion 4212 may be separated from each other and independent of each other, or a part of the adjacent window image forming portions 4212 may be integrated with each other. .. Between the front opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045 by the window drawing portion 4212, for example, the thickness of the horizontal cover portion 4210 or the first display substrate 4200 or more. A certain long distance is provided, and the window image forming portion 4212 functions as a light guide portion for guiding the light emitted from the LED 4045, and prevents the light from being diffused. In other words, even if a gap is provided between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display board 4200, or the portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is configured to project forward. The window imager 4212 that defines the window 4206 can guide the light of the LED 4045 to the front side without exception.

As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window image forming portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200 The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window drawing portion 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window image forming portion 4212 formed in a tubular shape is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the space between the adjacent LEDs 4045 is partitioned by the window image forming portion 4212. The first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are only in contact with the window drawing portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display board 4200, and are in contact with the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. It is basically configured so that there is a gap between it and the surface of the first display substrate 4200. As described above, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window image forming portion 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse, and the state of the LED 4045 is passed through the window 4206. Can be made easier to identify. Further, since the rear end of the window drawing portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 and closes the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200, light is next to the gap. It is possible to prevent leakage to the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. Moreover, even if the fraudulent tool is invaded from the window 4206, the fraudulent tool can be blocked only in the window 4206 by the window image forming unit 4212, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented more appropriately. It should be noted that the rear end (rear surface) of the window image forming portion 4212 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 may face each other so as to have a slight gap.

As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 includes a protruding alignment portion 4600 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window drawing portion 4212 so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the window drawing portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment portion 4600 is configured to fit into the substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 85) formed in the first display substrate 4200 so that the first display substrate 4200 can be aligned with the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are dispersedly arranged on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Of the plurality of alignment portions 4600, some may be formed apart from the window image forming portion 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a columnar shape. Although the alignment portion 4600 projects rearward from the rear surface of the window drawing portion 4212, its rear end is located on the front side of the rear end of the lateral cover portion 4210 and is housed inside the first cover member 4202. ..

The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circular shape in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. Further, the substrate hole 4400 is set to have an opening size that is the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number and position, and the alignment portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400 so that the first display substrate is formed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. It defines the relative position of 4200. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are assembled in a state of being vertically and horizontally positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400.

As described above, the first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are assembled in a state of being positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400, and thus correspond to the LED 4045. The window 4206 can be aligned with the window 4206 without deviation, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more preferably identified. Further, since the alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window image alignment portion 4212 and reinforced by the window image alignment portion 4212, the alignment portion 4600 can be configured to project rearward from the window image alignment portion 4212. It is possible to avoid damage and deformation of the window. By integrally forming the alignment portion 4600 with the window image forming portion 4212, the protruding dimension thereof can be shortened, and damage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed in an arrangement that sandwiches the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is arranged so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the first display board 4200, and is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of board holes 4400. More specifically, the first display board 4200 has a pair of board holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched horizontally (in the present embodiment), vertically or diagonally. A pair of alignment portions 4600 is provided in the first cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the paired substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in one side region of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100. It is distributed in the areas on both sides.

In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure of the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in the areas on both sides of the connector 4100. It is provided in a distributed manner. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached, but the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 sandwiched the connector 4100 can prevent the first display board 4200 from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 84, the protective member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back directions is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed according to the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passed through the connector opening 4300. The protective member 4204 is a state in which at least a part of the rear surface of the first display board 4200 housed in the first cover member 4202 is covered with the rear surface of the first display board 4200 from the outside so as to be difficult to access. It is attached to the cover member 4202 (the present embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200. The protective member 4204 is arranged so as to be fitted inside the first cover member 4202, and is arranged behind the first display substrate 4200, which is also housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protective member 4204 of the present embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the horizontal cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 comes into contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. .. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210, or the front cover portion is in front of the open end. Arranged on the 4208 side (front side), the entire protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202.

As described above, since the rear side of the first display board 4200 is covered with the protective member 4204, it becomes difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the rear, and the first display board 4200 is cheated. Can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protective member 4204 itself because it is obstructed by the first cover member 4202.

As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are assembled in a fitting structure due to unevenness, and after assembly, the first cover is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble. It is configured so that a trace of removal remains on either the member 4202 or the protective member 4204. In the fitting structure, the claw-shaped engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 (in the present embodiment, the protective member 4204) is provided with the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204. On the other hand (in the present embodiment, the first cover member 4202) is fitted into the engaging receiving portion 4216, and the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are caught by the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204, and is dispersed on the opposite sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 with the first display substrate 4200 interposed therebetween. It is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engaging receiving portion 4216 on the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form a rear opening edge in the engaging opening formed through the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 has a concave shape that opens the front side portion outward from the engagement opening to form a thin plate thickness, and the engagement receiving portion 4216 is erected over the opening side of the recess. That is, in the present embodiment, the engaging receiving portion 4216 has a plate thickness thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 4210 and is provided so that the inside is recessed so that the engaging portion 4214 can be easily fitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the protective member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 that projects from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protective member 4204. The width of the engaging portion 4214 and the width of the engaging receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness of the engaging portion 4214 in the front-rear direction and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engaging receiving portion 4216, the engaging portion 4214 is positioned by hitting the opening edge of the engaging opening. The engaging portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that inclines rearward as the front surface toward the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protective member 4204. In other words, the engaging portion 4214 extends so that the front surface intersects the engaging receiving portion 4216 at an angle, and the rear surface intersects the engaging receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is postponed. As a result, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engaging receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that hits the engaging receiving portion 4216, and engaged. It is possible to easily fit the engaging portion 4214 into the engaging opening by overcoming the receiving portion 4216. Then, when the engaging portion 4214 fits into the engaging opening, it is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are caught facing each other in a parallel relationship, so that the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. The first cover member 4202 is not guided so as to be expanded by the engaging portion 4214 as in the case of fitting the first cover member 4216 into the engaging receiving portion 4216. Therefore, the protective member 4204 cannot be substantially removed from the first cover member 4202 by fitting the engaging portion 4214 into the engaging receiving portion 4216.

As described above, according to the fitting structure of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216, it becomes difficult to remove the protective member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the protective member 4204 makes the first display substrate 4200. It can be protected to prevent fraudulent activity against the first display board 4200. Further, when the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, there is a trace of the engagement receiving portion 4216 being destroyed on the first cover member 4202. Remaining, traces of breaking the engaging portion 4214 will remain on the protective member 4204, and it will be easy to detect that there has been fraudulent activity. Further, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken, so that the protective member 4204 is reattached to the first cover member 4202. It becomes difficult to reassemble.

The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and leave traces of removal. As a result, the first display substrate 4200 arranged so as to be sandwiched between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, with respect to the first cover member 4202. Difficult to reassemble and leaving traces of removal on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, fraudulent activity on the first display board 4200 can be prevented, and even if there is fraudulent activity, it can be easily detected.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, identification means 4220 capable of identifying the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of two or more LED 4045 light emitting modes is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202. .. The identification means 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 from the transmitting portion 4222. Also includes a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that does not easily transmit light. Further, the identification means 4220 may include a combination area 4226 (FIG. 80) displayed on the shielding unit 4224 and showing the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The identification means 4220 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is often formed in a shape that matches the front region of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens, and in the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered to each other, but the size of the identification means 4220 and the method of attaching to the first cover member 4202 are not limited to this.

The transmitting portion 4222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmission portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206 so that the opening of the window 4206 and the LED 4045 arranged inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side by the transmission portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206. It is set to. Here, "affecting light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is made difficult to see by making it translucent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, and a mode in which the light is colored. It refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to appear large, a mode in which the light is converged to make the light emitted from the LED 4045 appear small, a mode in which these are combined, and the like. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 4222. The transmission portion 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with a plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission portions 4222 are identification means. It is provided in 4220. That is, in the identification means 4220, a square-shaped transparent portion 4222 that matches the window 4206 is formed in the same size as the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed by the transparent portion 4222.

Since the front side of the window 4206 is closed by the transmission portion 4222 in this way, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display board 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. Can be done. That is, the transparent portion 4222 can prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

A shield portion 4224 is provided around the transmission portion 4222 so that light is less likely to pass through than the transmission portion 4222 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, a shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmitting portion 4222, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the transmitting portion 4222 is formed in one sheet forming the identification means 4220. The shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black and a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue. It's different.

In this way, since the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult for light to pass through is provided around the transmitting portion 4222, the transmitting portion 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 4222 can be further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transparent portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to tell that the window 4206 is misaligned because it cannot be directly seen. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 4222 is applied to the window 4206, the transmissive portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

The shielding portion 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transparent portion 4222 is set on the same sheet, and the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 4224, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side through or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 4224.

As shown in FIG. 80, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by a partition sign 4228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the shielding portion 4224. The division sign 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transparent portions 4222, and the combination area 4226 surrounded by the division sign 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability game state indicator 68, the time-saving game state indicator 69, right-handed In the first display 67, the round number display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 4222) constitute the display. For those, a group of transmissive portions 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by a partition marker 4228 to form a corresponding combination area 4226 for each display. The section sign 4228 is not limited to the mode of the frame line, and may have a configuration capable of recognizing that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4226. ..

As shown in FIG. 80, specifically, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the section sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60. To do. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61. The transmission portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228, and the 1st special symbol is reserved. 1 The combination area 4226 corresponding to the display 63 is displayed. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol 1st display 61 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol holding 1st display 64. Further, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the division sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number indicator 66. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 is surrounded by the section sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62. From the right side of the lower row, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol hold first display 65 is displayed.

By displaying the combination area 4226 in this way, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and the player can easily recognize the information due to the combination of the LED 4045.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification means 4220 is arranged so as to overlap the first layer 4230, which easily transmits light, and the first layer 4230 on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 4232 that is less likely to transmit light than 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 4222 is composed of only the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 4232, it is difficult for light to pass through as a whole, and the light is prevented from passing through the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 4230 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is arranged on the front side (front side). The identification means 4220 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 4232 on a sheet made of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like, and a visible step is formed between the transmission portion 4222 and the shielding portion 4224. Absent.

When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state of being attached to the plate member of the game board 2, and is convenient.

The first cover member 4202 includes a thermoplastic resin or the like in which each part such as the front cover part 4208, the horizontal cover part 4210, the window drawing part 4212, the engagement receiving part 4216, and the alignment part 4600 is integrally formed. A molded product made of synthetic resin is used. Further, as the protective member 4204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which each part such as the engaging part 4214 is integrally formed is used.

By welding or adhering the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 while the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is attached to the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be attached in a state where it is difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, or a trace of removal remains.

(Modification example of the first game information display device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, the differences from the first game information display device 59 described above will be mainly described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 89, the first game information display device 59 is arranged on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 2, and the front side is covered with the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front-rear region on the front side of the game board 2, and is a rear portion including a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It has a box shape that opens to (Fig. 90). Here, the "front-rear area" is an area formed for providing the game area 2A through which the game ball passes on the front side of the plate member of the game board 2. When the covering member 4800 is arranged so that the front surface is substantially the same as the front end of the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and is arranged outside the outer rail member 29C (game area 2A) as in the present embodiment. May also serve as a board decoration. When the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 2A, one of the game parts installed in the game area 2A, such as the first start port 6, the second start port 7, and the grand prize opening 8. The portion may be composed of a covering member 4800.

The covering member 4800 has a portion that covers the front side of the first game information display device 59, such as transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59, so that the front side thereof is present. The state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the plate member of the game board 2 by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has a game board with respect to a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) described later, which is provided so that its back surface faces the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and faces the back side. It becomes accessible from the back side of 2. In this way, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member with the first game information display device 59 attached, and the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member in response to replacement of the first game information display device 59 or change of model. The 4800 can be easily replaced.

Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is more difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is committed, it is possible to gain time until the first display board 4200 is reached, and it is possible to make the fraudulent act even more difficult.

The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member, it can be easily replaced when the first game information display device 59 breaks down or the like. The first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble with respect to the covering member 4800 due to adhesion or the like, or when it is removed from the covering member 4800, either the first game information display device 59 or the covering member 4800. It may be installed in a configuration that leaves a trace of crab. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 has a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59, and the covering member 4800 or the covering member 4800 or the first by removing. 1 A configuration that cannot be reassembled due to the game information display device 59 being destroyed or deformed, or a covering member due to the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 being destroyed or deformed due to removal. The 4800 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one configuration in which a trace of removal remains.

The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized by the player via the covering member 4800. Further, the back side of the first game information display device 59 faces the back side of the game board 2 (plate member), and the connector 4100 (FIG. 93) provided so as to face the back side of the first game information display device 59 from the back side of the game board 2. It is accessible.

As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in this modification, current limiting means 4500 and 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 101 side. If the first game information display device 59 is electrically connected to the effect control board 102, the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 102. As shown in FIG. 97, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045 by mounting a resistor 4500 as a current limiting means on the main control board 101 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. Is being prevented. The resistor 4500 may be mounted through a hole for fixing the lead of the resistor 4500 to a hole in the printed circuit board, or may be surface-mounted on the main control board 101. As a result, in the main control board 101, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500, and the surface opposite to the mounting surface can be effectively used.

The resistor 4500 may be arranged at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the electric component on the other surface on the opposite side of the main control board 101 on which the electric component is mounted. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either all overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 101 sandwiched in the front-rear direction. By surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control board 101, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. In this way, the main control board 101 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 101.

As shown in FIG. 98, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as the driver 5600 on the main control board 101. The current limiting means 4500 limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value, thereby preventing an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045. By providing the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 on the main control board 101 side in this way, the resistance of the first display board 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. , The first game information display device 59 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIGS. 94, 95, and 96, when the first display board 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display board 4200 is the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 at a position aligned with the (rear end) or on the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) of the open end. The cover. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display board 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display board 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. 1 The presence of the cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. The first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment has an inner region formed in accordance with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

In this way, since the first display board 4200 is arranged in the state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the front side or the side side, and the first display board 4200 is used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the substrate 4200. Further, even if the first display board 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display board 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

As shown in FIG. 94, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engaging structure in which the alignment portion 4600 is melted and engaged with the first display substrate 4200, and after assembly. Are configured so that when they are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled, traces of removal remain on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted to be larger than the substrate hole 4400. By crushing in this way, a hooking portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the positioning portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window image forming portion 4212 and the hooking portion 4600a of the alignment portion 4600, and is fixed to the first cover member 4202.

As described above, according to the engagement structure described above, it becomes difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first cover member 4202 protects the first display substrate 4200 so as to be second. 1 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the display board 4200. Further, when the hooking portion 4600a is destroyed and the first display board 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, a trace of the destruction of the hooking portion 4600a remains on the first cover member 4202, resulting in fraudulent activity. It becomes easier to discover that there was. Further, when the first display board 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the hooking portion 4600a is broken and the first display board 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202. , It becomes difficult to reassemble.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, identification means 4220 capable of identifying the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of two or more LED 4045 light emitting modes is arranged on the front side of the first cover member 4202. .. The identification means 4220 may be arranged in association with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as being provided only on the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or dispersedly provided on the first cover member 4202 and the covering member 4800. Further, the identification means 4220 may have any configuration such as a configuration attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, or a configuration provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800. The identification means 4220 of the present embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and includes a first identification unit 5122. The second identification unit 5124 is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 89, the identification means 4220 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800 separately from the second identification unit 5124.

As shown in FIG. 94, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is a transmission unit 5126 as a first region capable of transmitting light or affecting the transmitted light, and a transmission unit 5126. It is provided with a shielding portion 5128 as a second region which is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmitting portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification unit 5122 is often formed in a shape that matches the front area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 is first identified so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Part 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 5122, but the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The method of attaching to the 4202 is not limited to this. The first identification unit 5122 may be provided with a combination region showing two or more LED 4045 light emitting modes as a combination.

The transmitting portion 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and can transmit the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmission portion 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmission portion 5126 on the front side of the window 4206 covers the front opening of the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 arranged inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, "affecting light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is made difficult to see by making it translucent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, and a mode in which the light is colored. It refers to a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused to appear large, a mode in which the light is converged to make the light emitted from the LED 4045 appear small, a mode in which these are combined, and the like. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 5126. The transmission portion 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission portions 5126 are first arranged in accordance with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. It is provided in the identification unit 5122. That is, in the first identification unit 5122, a square-shaped transmissive portion 5126 that matches the window 4206 is formed in the same size as the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 5126 closes the front opening of the window 4206 without a gap. ..

Since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transmission portion 5126 in this way, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display board 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. it can. That is, the transmission unit 5126 can prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the states of adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

A shield portion 5128 is provided around the transmission portion 5126 so that light cannot easily pass through the transmission portion 5126 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 5128 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmitting portion 5126, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the transmitting portion 5126 is formed in one sheet forming the first identification portion 5122. The shielding portion 5128 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black and a dark color having a low degree of brightness (absorbing light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue. It's different.

As described above, since the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmitting portion 5126, the transmitting portion 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 5126 can be further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to tell that the window 4206 is misaligned because it cannot be directly seen. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 5126 is applied to the window 4206, the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the shielding portion 5128 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

The shielding portion 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the same sheet of the transmitting portion 5126 is set, and the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 5128 to make the transparent portion of the sheet Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side through or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5128.

As shown in FIG. 95, the first identification unit 5122 is arranged so as to overlap the first layer 5130 which easily transmits light and the first layer 5130 on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 5126 is composed of only the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5131, it is difficult for light to pass through in the laminating direction (thickness direction), and the light is prevented from being transmitted from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5130 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is arranged on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5131 on a sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There is no step.

By configuring the first identification unit 5122 in this way, even if the window 4206 and the transmission unit 5126 are misaligned, the first layer 5130 can guide light to the transmission unit 5126, and the shielding unit 5128 can be guided. Since the transmitting portion 5126 surrounded by the light shines, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. Moreover, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmitting portion 5126 can be clearly identified.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second identification unit 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and is attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light transmission unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and around the light transmission unit 5132. It includes a light-shielding unit 5134 as a second region that is less likely to transmit light than the light-transmitting unit 5132. Further, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and showing the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The second identification unit 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed according to the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification unit 5124 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the second identification unit 5124, but the size of the second identification unit 5124 and the method of attaching to the covering member 4800 are different. Not limited to this.

The light transmitting portion 5132 of the present modification is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and affects the light that can be transmitted or is transmitted by the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. It has become like. The light transmitting portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 is made visible through the window 4206 by the light transmitting portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of the present embodiment is transparent and is formed in a range corresponding to a plurality of windows 4206. The light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light in the same manner as the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identification unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light transmitting unit 5132, it becomes easier to distinguish the state of the LED 4045, and it becomes easier to distinguish the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045.

A light-shielding portion 5134 is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132 so that light is less likely to pass through than the light-transmitting portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, a light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The light-shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light-transmitting portion 5132, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the light-transmitting portion 5132 is formed in one sheet forming the second identification unit 5124. The light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The light-shielding unit 5134 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black and a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue. Is different.

In this way, since the light-shielding portion 5134 that does not easily transmit light is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132, the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4045 recognized via the light-transmitting portion 5132 The situation becomes easier to discern. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to tell that they are misaligned.

The light-shielding portion 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the light-transmitting portion 5132 is set on the same sheet, and the front surface of the portion of the covering member 4800 corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 is set as the light-shielding portion 5134, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the light-shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side, or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the light-shielding portion 5134. The covering member 4800 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be closed by a second identification unit 5124 (light transmitting portion 5132 and / or light shielding portion 5134).

The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition sign 4806 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the light-shielding portion 5134. The section sign 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light transmitting portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the section sign 4806 can be recognized in distinction from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability game state indicator 68, the time-saving game state indicator 69, right-handed In the first display 67, the round number display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65, among these, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 5126 or light transmission unit 5132) For those constituting the display, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 5126 or light transmission unit 5132) corresponding to the display is surrounded by a partition marker 4806 to form a combination area 4804 corresponding to each display. The section sign 4806 is not limited to the mode of the frame line, and may have a configuration capable of recognizing that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4804. ..

Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by surrounding it with a section sign 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold 1st display is surrounded by a compartment sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol 1st indicator 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the vessel 63 is displayed. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol reservation first display 64 is displayed by surrounding it with a section sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. Further, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number indicator 66 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. From the right side of the lower row, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045.

By displaying the combination area 4804 in this way, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the information due to the combination of the LED 4045.

As shown in FIG. 95, the second identification unit 5124 is arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side of the first layer 5136 in addition to the first layer 5136 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 4206, and the first layer. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5138 that is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 is composed of only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the light shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. It is composed of a laminated part with. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5138, it is difficult for light to pass through as a whole, and the light is prevented from passing through the light-shielding portion 5134. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5136 is arranged on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is arranged on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the light transmitting unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.

The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification unit 4802 is formed in a sheet shape and is arranged at a position different from that of the second identification unit 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment) on the front surface of the covering member 4800. The displayed information of the third identification unit 4802 is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification unit 4802 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the third identification unit 4802, but the size of the third identification unit 4802 and the method of attaching to the covering member 4800 are different. Not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122, or may be displayed separately from the identification means 4220, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. ..

By providing the third identification unit 4802 in this way, the amount of information that can be displayed increases, and the information displayed by the first game information display device 59 can be made easier to understand. In addition, by dividing each information and displaying it in a plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes such as when changing models.

The identification unit 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured to cover its peripheral surface with the protection unit 4808 (FIG. 90). In the present embodiment, the protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identification portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identification portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each of the peripheral surfaces of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection unit 4808 is composed of a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed according to the shape of the identification unit 4802, 5124 corresponding to the mounting position of the identification unit 4802, 5124. There is. Further, the recess of the covering member 4800 has a depth of about the thickness of the identification portions 4802, 5124, and the protective portion 4808 faces the peripheral surface of the identification portions 4802, 5124 fitted and attached to the recess, and the identification portion The entire circumference of 4802,5124 is surrounded by a protective portion 4808.

By covering the peripheral surface of the identification unit 4802, 5124 with the protective unit 4808 in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the protective unit 4808 to access the identification unit 4802, 5124, and the peripheral surface can be hooked with a claw or the like to hook the peripheral surface with the identification unit. It is possible to prevent the 4802 and 5124 from being removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as replacing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the first display board 4200. Further, by attaching the identification units 4802, 5124 to the covering member 4800 with reference to the protection unit 4808, the identification units 4802, 5124 can be aligned. In particular, since the second identification unit 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.

In this modification, the protective unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification unit 4802, 5124, but the protective unit 4808 is used as a part of the peripheral surface of the identification unit 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220). It may be configured to be provided correspondingly.

As the information displayed by the identification means 4220, information on the profit given to the player in the game (sometimes referred to as game state information in the description) displayed by the first game information display device 59 is assisted or explained. Game status display such as, unique display showing unique information such as model name, probability of game machine 1 (for example, 1/299), probability change rate of game machine 1 (for example, 60/100), big hit It is preferable to display the spec display showing the spec information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R, etc.) alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods that can be visually recognized by the player.

For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the section sign 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as a combination. The game state information displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 may be easily identified and assisted.

FIG. 91 is a description showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied corresponding to the round number display 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the game status display 4810 has a number of rounds at a position such as a position corresponding to the side of the round number display 66, which is known to correspond to the round number display 66. A pattern schematically representing the display 66 may be configured to describe the display mode and the number of rounds of the LED 4045 for each round. The game state display 4810 of FIG. 91 (a) explains the game state information (number of rounds) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game state display 4810 of FIG. 91 (a), it is possible to easily identify the game state information (number of rounds) shown by the round number display 66.

Further, as the game status display 4810, by arranging signs such as numbers and symbols corresponding to the LED 4045 at a position corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 (FIG. 91 (b)) or on the front side (FIG. 91 (c)). The sign may be used to assist the state of the LED 4045 to be associated and recognized as a combination, or to explain the state of the LED 4045. The sign may have a different color or shape.

The identification means 4220 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided on the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identification means 4220 can be assigned and set in the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of the respective identification units 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. Further, by assigning and setting the functions required for the identification means 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. Moreover, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult to obtain with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

Since the covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the game board 2, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 2 and replaced when the model is changed, the identification portions 4802, 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 can be replaced. Can be easily replaced including. If the unique display and the spec display are performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be supported by replacing the covering member 4800. Further, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of the structure of the second game information display device 79)
As shown in FIG. 99, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs include the first and second special symbol second indicators 88 and 89, the first and second special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84, the ordinary symbol second indicator 82, and the ordinary symbol hold second display. The device 85 and the right-handed second display 87 are configured.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the second game information display device 79 covers at least the second display board 5800 on which 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the surface and the front side of the second display board 5800. It is composed of a second cover member 5710 and the like. Although not shown here, on the front side (top) of the second cover member 5710, an identification means capable of identifying the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs is arranged. ..

The second cover member 5710 is composed of a plate-shaped pedestal portion 5730 forming the bottom of the second cover member 5710 and a triangular columnar protruding portion 5720 protruding from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners of the side surface of the protruding portion 5720 are chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protruding portion 5720 facing the player.

The second display board 5800 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, which is a surface facing the player, and can irradiate light from each LED toward the front side. The LED is surface-mounted on the second display board 5800, not through-hole mounting in which the leads of the LED are fixed to the holes in the printed circuit board. In the second display board 5800, the light emitting element of the LED and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display board 5800 are on the same front surface of the second display board 5800. That is, the lead for connecting the LED to the circuit does not protrude from the rear surface of the second display board 5800, and the solder for fixing the LED is not arranged on the rear surface. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED, either a chip type or a cannonball type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but the chip type is preferable because of the advantage that the space can be reduced. In the second display board 5800, states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs are controlled under the control of the control means of the effect control board 102, and states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking, and combinations and states thereof. Information on the profits given to the player due to changes or the like is displayed.

By surface-mounting the LEDs on the second display board 5800 in this way, the space for arranging the LEDs on the second display board 5800 can be reduced, and the second display board 5800 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED on the second display board 5800, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED on the front surface of the second display board 5800, the mounting of the LED does not affect the rear surface of the second display board 5800 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the second display board 5800, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display board 5800 is effectively used. It can be used, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.

The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, or a configuration in which the LED is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front region on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front region. An absorption unit may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be efficiently used. When the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. It can be prevented from doing so.

The projecting portion 5720 is formed with ten light guide hole portions 5740 as windows penetrating the projecting portion 5720 along the projecting direction. Further, the second display substrate 5800 is attached to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 while covering the surface thereof, and each light guide hole portion 5740 is surface-mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. It is arranged at the position corresponding to the LED. This makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 via the light guide hole portion 5740.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the second display board 5800, a connector 5810 wired to the LED surface-mounted on the front surface is provided (see FIG. 100), and the LED and the effect control board 102 are provided via the connector 5810. And are connected.

The second display board 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display board 5800 is removable and reassembled with respect to the second cover member 5710. It can be attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display board 5800 without leaving any trace when disassembled.

The method of attaching the second display board 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by attaching using the engaging portion and the engaging receiving portion. , The second cover member 5710 may be detachably, reassembled, and attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display board 5800 without leaving a trace when disassembled.

Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular columnar shape, and various shapes such as a cylindrical columnar shape and a square columnar shape can be considered. Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, and 10 light guide holes corresponding to each LED are mounted on the second cover member 5710. Although 5740 is formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is conceivable to provide one or more LEDs and light guide holes.

Further, the second game information display device 79 may be divided and arranged in a plurality of display devices according to the function. In that case, the second game information display device 79 may be arranged adjacent to the inner rail member 29B in the lower left of the game area 2A. It may be arranged in a plurality of places in the game area 2A.

When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 88 and the first special symbol hold second display 89 are set as one display device, and the second display device is used. The special symbol 2nd display 81 and the 2nd special symbol holding 2nd display 84 are used as one display device, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 and the normal symbol holding 2nd display are used as one display device. Two display devices may be used as one display device.

Further, the first special symbol 2nd display 88, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 89, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 are used as one display device, and the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 83 and the 2nd special are used as one display device. The symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 may be used as one display device, and the right-handed second display may be used as one display device.

Further, the first special symbol 2nd display 88, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 89, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 are used as one display device, and the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 83 is used as one display. As a device, the second special symbol holding second display 84 may be used as one display device, and the normal symbol holding second display 85 and the right-handed second display may be used as one display device.

(Frequency of appearance of production buttons and lever operation promotion effects)
Next, the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of the variation pattern selected in the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, and the distribution in which the effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A is selected.

Specifically, FIG. 101 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a low-probability gaming state, and FIG. 101 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for a low-probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example. Further, FIG. 101 (B-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a high-probability gaming state, and FIG. 101 (B-2) is an example of an operation promotion effect determination table for a high-probability gaming state. It is a figure which shows.
The low-probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-1) and the high-probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-1) are stored in the main ROM 101b. Further, the operation promotion effect determination table for the low-probability gaming state shown in FIG. 101 (A-2) and the operation promotion effect determination table for the high-probability gaming state shown in FIG. 101 (B-2) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. ..

As shown in FIG. 101 (A-1), in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery in the low probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “01” or “02” is selected at a ratio of “80:20”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern "03" or "04" is selected at a ratio of "60:40".

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (A-2), when the fluctuation pattern "01" (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of "100: 0", that is, , Only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. When the variation pattern "02" (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "80:20".

Further, when the variation pattern "03" (hit) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "80:20", and the variation pattern "04" (hit) is selected. If so, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "70:30".

Further, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-1), in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern "07" or "08" is selected at a ratio of "50:50".

Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-2), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "80:20". Will be done. When the fluctuation pattern "06" (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "60:40".

Further, when the variation pattern "07" (hit) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "20:80", and the variation pattern "08" (hit) is selected. If so, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

As described above, in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to be selected than in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). It has become. Further, in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to be selected than the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), it becomes easier to select an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). There is.
Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state, an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability game state, and the effect using the effect button 18A can enhance the interest. Further, in the low-probability game state, the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 19A, and the characteristic effect in the low-probability game state can enhance the interest. Further, in the high-probability gaming state, an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A is more likely to occur than in the low-probability game state, and the effect using the effect lever 19A can enhance the interest, and the effect lever 19A is used. Since the produced effect is a characteristic effect in the high-probability gaming state, it is possible to enhance the interest in particular.

In the present embodiment, it is easier to select an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A than in the high-probability gaming state in the low-probability gaming state, but in the low-probability gaming state, it is easier than in the high-probability gaming state. The effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A may be easily selected. Further, in the low-probability gaming state, it is easier to select the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, but the effect lever that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. The effect that encourages the operation of 19A may be easily selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to select an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low-probability gaming state, but in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier than in the low-probability gaming state. The effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be easily selected.

Further, in the low-probability gaming state, only the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected, and in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Further, in the low-probability gaming state, only the effect prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected, and in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected. In some cases, neither the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Direction change mode when the production button production is selected)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect button 18A when the effect by the effect button 18A is selected will be described.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of an effect button effect change mode determination table. Note that FIG. 102 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table, and FIG. 102 (B) is an example of a high-probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table. It is a figure which shows.
The low-probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (A) and the high-probability game state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. ..

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101.
Further, the low-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the low-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. The high-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when the fluctuation pattern "01" (loss) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the ratio of "100: 0" is "no protrusion". Or "with protrusion", that is, only "without protrusion" is selected. Further, when the variation pattern "02" (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "90:10".

On the other hand, when the variation pattern "03" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "30:70". Further, when the variation pattern "04" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "20:80".
In addition, "no protrusion" is an effect in which the effect is completed with the effect button 18A in the normal state (state of FIG. 72 (a)), and "with protrusion" is a state in which the effect button 18A is projected (state in which the effect button 18A is projected). It is an effect that changes in the middle of the effect to the state of FIG. 72B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the ratio of "protrusion" is "100: 0". Only "none" or "with protrusions", that is, "no protrusions" is selected. Further, when the variation pattern "06" (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "95: 5".

On the other hand, when the variation pattern "07" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "20:80". Further, when the variation pattern "08" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern "no protrusion" or "with protrusion" is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

As described above, at the time of winning, the protruding effect of the effect button 18A is easily executed (see FIG. 102). As described above, in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect related to the effect button 18A is selected rather than the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). It's getting easier. Therefore, in the low-probability game state, the effect related to the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability game state, and at the time of winning, the projecting effect of the effect button 18A is more likely to be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

(Production change mode when the production lever production is selected)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect lever 19A when the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected will be described.

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example of an effect lever effect change mode determination table. Note that FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table, and FIG. 103 (B) is an example of a high-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table. It is a figure which shows.
The low-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103 (A) and the high-probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. ..

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101.
Further, the low-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected in the low-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table. The high-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when the effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected in the high-probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the fluctuation pattern “01” (loss) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” is selected at a ratio of “100: 0”. Or "with vibration", that is, only "without vibration" is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "02" (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "90:10".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern "03" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "30:70". When the fluctuation pattern "04" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "20:80".
In addition, "no vibration" is an effect in which the effect ends in the normal state (non-vibration state) of the effect lever 19A, and "with vibration" means that the effect lever 19A is in a vibrated state in the middle of the effect. It is a changing production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "vibration" is performed at a ratio of "100: 0". Only "without" or "with vibration", that is, "without vibration" is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "06" (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "95: 5".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern "07" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "20:80". When the fluctuation pattern "08" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

As described above, at the time of winning, the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is easily executed (see FIG. 103). As described above, in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected rather than the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). It's getting easier. Therefore, in the high-probability game state, the effect related to the effect lever 19A is more likely to occur than in the low-probability game state, and at the time of winning, the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is more likely to be executed, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

(Production button in high-probability game state, frequency of appearance of effect promotion effect of effect lever (effect button <effect lever), and effect change mode when effect lever effect is selected)
Next, an effect when the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the high-probability gaming state is different from that of the above embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 is a variation pattern determination table and the like in a high-probability gaming state. Specifically, FIG. 104 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a high-probability gaming state, and FIG. 104 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for a high-probability gaming state. FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table.
The fluctuation pattern determination table for the high-probability gaming state shown in FIG. 104 (A-1) is stored in the main ROM 101b. Further, the operation promotion effect determination table for the high-probability gaming state shown in FIG. 104 (A-2) and the effect lever effect change mode determination table for the high-probability gaming state shown in FIG. 104 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. ..

As shown in FIG. 104 (A-1), in the case of a loss in the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state, the fluctuation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of a hit, the fluctuation pattern "07" or "08" is selected at a ratio of "60:40".

Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A-2), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "40:60". Will be done. When the fluctuation pattern "06" (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "30:70".

Further, when the variation pattern "07" (hit) is selected, the effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "20:80", and the variation pattern "08" (hit) is selected. If so, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), when the fluctuation pattern "05" (loss) is selected in the high probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "vibration" is performed at a ratio of "100: 0". Only "without" or "with vibration", that is, "without vibration" is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "06" (loss) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "95: 5".

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern "07" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "20:80". When the fluctuation pattern "08" (hit) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern "no vibration" or "with vibration" is selected at a ratio of "10:90".

As described above, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is more likely to be selected than the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A (see FIG. 104 (A-2)). Since the vibration effect of the lever 19A is easily executed (see FIG. 104 (B)), the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to select an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A, but the operation of the effect lever 19A is promoted. It may be easier to select an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 18A rather than the effect. Further, in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Further, in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, either the effect of urging the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect of urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected. In some cases, neither the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(A production that allows the operation of multiple operation units (effect button and production lever))
Next, a case where not only the effect lever 19A but also the effect button 18A is effective during the lever promotion operation effect of the effect lever 19A will be described.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of a variable effect determination table or the like that enables the operation of a plurality of operation units (effect button 18A and effect lever 19A).
Specifically, FIG. 105 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for a high-probability gaming state, and FIG. 105 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for a high-probability gaming state. FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an operation valid period of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 when a variable effect pattern in which the operation of the plurality of operation units (effect button 18A and effect lever 19A) is effective is selected.

In the following, a case where the player wins the jackpot lottery in the high-probability game state, the variation pattern “07” is selected, and the effect for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected will be described.

As shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the sub CPU 102a selects a variation effect pattern in which the operations of the plurality of operation units are valid, first, all three decorative symbols are varied with respect to the image display device 14. By displaying the effect image as if it were done, a variable effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the sub CPU 102a temporarily stops and displays the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol with symbols showing the same numbers, and the reach in which only the central decorative symbol is changed. The effect is displayed on the image display device 14.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the sub CPU 102a temporarily stops and displays the central decorative symbol with a symbol indicating a number different from the numbers of the left and right decorative symbols. Then, the sub CPU 102a waits until a time that can be recognized by the player elapses in this state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the sub CPU 102a moves, for example, the first decorative member 17A as a gimmick so that it appears on the front surface of the image display device 14. The sub CPU 102a changes the display of the decorative pattern from substantially the center to the upper right, reduces the display range, and displays it in the reach effect state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the sub CPU 102a retracts the first decorative member 17A from the front surface of the image display device 14 (for example, returns it to the initial position), and causes the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14. The lever promotion operation effect for operating is performed over a predetermined valid period. Further, at this time, the sub CPU 102a is illuminated to make it easier to recognize that the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A can be operated. Further, the sub CPU 102a is brought into a protruding state in order to facilitate the operation of the effect button 18A. It is not necessary to dare to make the effect button 18A shine or to make it protrude.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105B, the sub CPU 102a enables the operation of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A at the same time as the start of the lever promotion operation effect. The operation of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A is effective while the lever promotion operation effect is being performed. When the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the lever promotion operation effect ends, and the operation valid period of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A also ends. If neither the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the operation of the effect button 18A is detected within the operation valid period, the operations of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A become invalid at the end of the operation valid period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), when the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display an effect image showing the lottery result.

As described above, even if the image display device 14 is only subjected to the lever promotion operation effect for operating the effect lever 19A, the operation of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A is effective, so that the player Can play a game by using an operation unit that is easy to operate among the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A, and can improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, two operation units, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more operation units may be used.

(1st specific example related to state transition, and 6th specific example of distribution of fluctuation pattern and operation means related to fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a first specific example relating to the state transition and a sixth specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means related to the fluctuation pattern will be described. In FIG. 107, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 107 (B-1) has been determined.

First, FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of an effect displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, "start of fluctuation" when the effect symbol starts to fluctuate, "before reach" after the effect symbol starts to fluctuate and before reach is performed, and "after reach" after the reach is formed. And "development reach" that is performed after the "post-reach". In the reach performed in the "post-reach" period, a reach with a relatively low expectation for a jackpot is executed, and for example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped. After that, it transitions to the reach performed during the "development reach" period. It should be noted that the reach performed during the "development reach" period (for example, "special reach") has a relatively higher expectation for a jackpot than the reach performed during the "post-reach" period (for example, "super reach"). High reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern, there is also a pattern that stops the loss at the reach performed during the "post-reach" period and ends the fluctuation without transitioning to the "development reach". For example, when a symbol indicating loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped, it then transitions to "development reach" or changes from temporary stop to fixed stop without transitioning to "development reach". It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ends.

Then, the image display device 14 displays an image imitating the effect button 18A and displays an image (press the button!) Prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "before reach" after the "start of fluctuation". To do. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. When the "operation valid period" is set, when the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, the operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. If the “operation valid period” is not set, the operation information is not input to the effect control board 102 even if the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Further, it is assumed that the operation valid period is set at the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or is set longer than that. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation valid period, for example, a notice image or the like for notifying that reach is formed is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, a character image is displayed to notify the possibility that a reach is formed depending on the type of the character, the dialogue of the character, or the like. It should be noted that such an effect may not be displayed if the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation valid period, and if the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation valid period, it may not be displayed. It may be automatically displayed after the operation validity period has elapsed. Before reaching, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!), An image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed for the effect. An image prompting the operation of the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later in FIG. 107 (B-2).

Then, in the image display device 14, the reach is formed after displaying an image or the like prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in "before reach". Here, in the example of FIG. 107, in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, the “7” symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (left), and the “7” symbol is displayed in the effect symbol display area (right). , It shows how the effect symbol display area (middle) is variablely displayed. Then, a "reach!" Image indicating that the reach has been formed is displayed.

Then, in the image display device 14, after the reach is formed, in "after reach", for example, an effect corresponding to "super reach" is executed, and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of "super reach". There will be a production that encourages whether or not to transition to "special reach". In "Super Reach", the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped and then transitioned to "Special Reach", or the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped without being temporarily stopped. It may be configured to transition to "reach".

Then, in the image display device 14, in the "after reach" and in the "development reach", for example, an effect corresponding to the "special reach" is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. It is derived, and if the loss is determined, the symbol indicating the loss is derived. In deriving the symbol of either the jackpot or the loss, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation valid period is set at the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, or is set longer than that. That is, when deriving one of the symbols, an image (pull the lever!) Prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and the player operates the effect lever 19A, so that the player operates the effect lever 19A. By operating it, the effect is such that either a big hit or a lost symbol is derived. It is assumed that the derivation of either the jackpot or the lost symbol is automatically displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed if the effect lever 19A is not operated during the operation valid period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!), An image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed to produce the effect. An image (press the button!) Prompting the operation of the button 18A may be displayed. The details will be described later in FIG. 107 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 107, the symbol "777" indicating the jackpot is derived, and an image (big hit !!) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed.

Next, FIG. 107 (B-1) is a diagram showing the relationship between the fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) in the low-probability gaming state, the content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect content), and the distribution of the fluctuation pattern. is there. Note that FIG. 107 (B-1) is an excerpt of a part of the fluctuation pattern for convenience of explanation, and also has a plurality of fluctuation patterns. The "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)" is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the content is defined as the production content that transitions from "normal reach" to "super reach". Has been done. Further, the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)" is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the content is defined as the production content that transitions from "normal reach" to "special reach". Has been done. When the result of the jackpot judgment is a loss, the distribution in which "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)" is selected is "80/100", and the distribution in which "variation pattern 02 (loss)" is selected is It is "20/100", and the ratio of "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)" being selected is high. Any value can be set for the distribution value. The "variation pattern 03 (hit)" is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, and the content is defined as the production content that transitions from "normal reach" to "super reach". Has been done. Further, the "variation pattern 04 (hit)" is a fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, and the content is a transition from "normal reach" to "super reach", and further, " The content of the production that transitions from "Super Reach" to "Special Reach" is defined. When the result of the jackpot judgment is a hit, the distribution in which "variation pattern 03 (hit)" is selected is "50/100", and the distribution in which "variation pattern 04 (hit)" is selected is It is "50/100", and the selected ratio is even. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

Next, FIG. 107 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A “before reach” and the operation of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship between the ratio of executing the effect, the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A after the reach, and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A “before reach” and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and the image display device 14 It can be said that the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A after the reach and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is shown.

In "Before reach" of "Fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100". Therefore, the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "before reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10 /". It is "100". Further, in the "before reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0 /". It is "100", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "before reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10 /". It is "100". That is, in "before reach", it can be said that the ratio of the effect button 18A selected is higher than that of the effect lever 19A as a whole of the fluctuation pattern. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

On the other hand, in the "after reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10 /". It is "100". Further, in the "after reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100 / 100 /". It is "100", and the effect button 18A is not selected. Further, in the "after reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "50/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "50 / 100". It is "100". Further, in the "after reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100 /". It is "100". That is, in "after reach", it can be said that the ratio of the effect lever 19A being selected is higher than that of the effect button 18A as a whole of the fluctuation pattern. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

In this way, in "before reach", the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than that of selecting the effect lever 19A, and after "reach", the effect is produced rather than selecting the effect button 18A. By increasing the selection ratio of the lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which of the operating means is to be operated when the plurality of operating means are provided. It is also possible to set the operation valid period of the effect button 18A and the operation valid period of the effect lever 19A while performing the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. However, in this case, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, the effect of urging the operation only executes the effect of urging the operation of either one of the operating means, but any of the operating means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operating means are provided, the player can operate the operating means that he / she wants to operate, so that the hobby of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the 1st specific example relating to the state transition, it can be changed as follows. That is, in FIG. 107, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A “before reach” after the “start of fluctuation” is displayed, and the “operation valid period” is set, but the effect button is set at the timing of the “start of fluctuation”. An image prompting the operation of 18A may be displayed and an "operation validity period" may be set. In addition, in the "development reach", an image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is displayed, and the player is made to operate the production lever 19A, so that the player operates the production lever 19A, which is a big hit or a loss. Although it was decided to perform the effect as if any of the symbols was derived, the timing of performing the effect may be any timing as long as it is between the "reach" and the timing of deriving the symbol. Further, as the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Further, an image may be displayed in which only the meter image is displayed and the gauge image is changed according to the operation validity period. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operating means can be operated is displayed.

(The second specific example related to the state transition, and the seventh specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means related to the fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a second specific example relating to the state transition and a seventh specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means related to the fluctuation pattern will be described. In FIG. 108, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) has been determined.

First, FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of an effect displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the "start of fluctuation" in which the production symbol starts to fluctuate, the "after reach (first reach)" after the reach is formed, and the "development reach (first reach)" performed after the "after reach". 2 reach) ”. In the reach performed in the "post-reach" period, a reach with a relatively low expectation for a jackpot is executed, and for example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped. After that, it transitions to the reach performed during the "development reach" period. It should be noted that the reach performed during the "development reach" period (for example, "special reach") has a relatively higher expectation for a jackpot than the reach performed during the "post-reach" period (for example, "super reach"). High reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern, there is also a pattern that stops the loss at the reach performed during the "post-reach" period and ends the fluctuation without transitioning to the "development reach". For example, when a symbol indicating loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped, it then transitions to "development reach" or changes from temporary stop to fixed stop without transitioning to "development reach". It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game ends.

Then, in the image display device 14, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed "after the reach" after the reach is formed, and an image (press the button!) Prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect button 18A via the lamp control board 104. The operation validity period is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set at the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or longer than that. It is expected to be set. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation valid period, for example, a notice image or the like foretelling the possibility of transition to the development reach is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, a character image is displayed to notify the possibility of transition to the development reach depending on the type of the character, the dialogue of the character, and the like. It should be noted that such an effect may not be displayed if the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation valid period, and if the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation valid period, it may not be displayed. It may be automatically displayed after the operation validity period has elapsed. After the reach, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!), An image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed to produce the effect. An image prompting the operation of the lever 19A (pull the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later in FIG. 108 (B-2).

In "after reach", after temporarily stopping the lost symbol, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A may be displayed. For example, when it is decided to transition to the development reach, in "after reach", after temporarily stopping the lost symbol, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is displayed. When operated, the first decorative member 17A may be activated to transition to development reach.

Then, in the image display device 14, in the "development reach", for example, an effect corresponding to the "special reach" is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is derived and the loss is determined. If so, a symbol indicating the deviation is derived. In deriving any of these symbols, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the effect lever 19A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation valid period is set at the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, or is set longer than that. In other words, when deriving either the jackpot or the lost symbol, an image (pull the lever!) Prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and the player is made to operate the effect lever 19A as if the player By operating the effect lever 19A, the effect is such that either a jackpot or a loss pattern is derived. It is assumed that the derivation of either the jackpot or the lost symbol is automatically displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed if the effect lever 19A is not operated during the operation valid period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!), An image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed to produce the effect. An image (press the button!) Prompting the operation of the button 18A may be displayed. The details will be described later in FIG. 108 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 108, the symbol "777" indicating the jackpot is derived, and an image (big hit !!) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed.

Next, since FIG. 108 (B-1) is the same as the content described in the description of FIG. 107 (B-1), the description thereof will be omitted. Next, FIG. 108 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “first reach” and the effect lever 19A corresponding to the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship between the ratio of executing the operation effect and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the "second reach" and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the "first reach" and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and the image display device. In 14, it can be said that the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the “second reach” and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is shown.

In the "first reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100". , And the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "first reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10". It is "/ 100". Further, in the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0". It is "/ 100", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. Further, in the "first reach" of the "variation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "90/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "10". It is "/ 100". That is, in the "first reach", it can be said that the ratio of the effect button 18A selected is higher than that of the effect lever 19A as a whole of the fluctuation pattern. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

On the other hand, in the "second reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "80/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "20". It is "/ 100". Further, in the "second reach" of the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "10/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "90". It is "/ 100", and the effect button 18A is not selected. Further, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "50/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "50". It is "/ 100". Further, in the "second reach" of the "variation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100". It is "/ 100". That is, in the "second reach", it can be said that the ratio of the effect lever 19A being selected is higher than that of the effect button 18A as a whole of the fluctuation pattern. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

As described above, in the "first reach", the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than that of the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the "second reach", the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the selection ratio of the effect lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which operation means is to be operated when a plurality of operation means are provided. It is also possible to set the operation valid period of the effect button 18A and the operation valid period of the effect lever 19A while performing the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. However, in this case, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, the effect of urging the operation only executes the effect of urging the operation of either one of the operating means, but any of the operating means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operating means are provided, the player can operate the operating means that he / she wants to operate, so that the hobby of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the second specific example relating to the state transition, it can be changed as follows. That is, in FIG. 108, in the "first reach", an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the "operation valid period" is set, but if the "first reach" is performed, , The timing for displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and setting the "operation valid period" may be any timing. In addition, in the "second reach", an image prompting the operation of the production lever 19A is displayed, and the player is made to operate the production lever 19A, so that the player operates the production lever 19A, which is a big hit or a loss. It was decided to perform the effect as if any of the symbols in the above was derived, but the timing of performing the effect may be any timing as long as the "second reach" is being performed. .. Further, as the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Further, an image may be displayed in which only the meter image is displayed and the gauge image is changed according to the operation validity period. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operating means can be operated is displayed.

(Third specific example related to state transition, and eighth specific example of distribution of fluctuation pattern and operation means related to fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a third specific example relating to the state transition and an eighth specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means related to the fluctuation pattern will be described. In FIG. 109, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 02” and “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) have been determined.

First, FIG. 109 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of an effect displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is composed of a "fluctuation start" in which the production symbol starts to fluctuate, a "reach" in which a reach is formed, and a "development reach" in which a transition from the "reach" occurs. In the reach performed during the "reach" period, a reach with a relatively low expectation for a jackpot is executed, and for example, a symbol indicating a loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped. After that, it transitions to the reach performed during the "development reach" period. It should be noted that the reach performed during the "development reach" period (for example, "special reach") has a relatively higher expectation for a jackpot than the reach performed during the "reach" period (for example, "super reach"). Reach is performed. In addition, depending on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern, there is also a pattern in which the loss is stopped at the reach performed during the "reach" period and the fluctuation is terminated without transitioning to the "development reach". , When the symbol showing the loss (for example, "767") is temporarily stopped, then it transitions to "development reach", or it becomes a definite stop from the temporary stop, and the fluctuation does not transition to "development reach". It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will end.

Then, in the image display device 14, in the "development reach" after the "reach", for example, an effect corresponding to the "special reach" is executed, and when the jackpot is determined, a symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. It is derived, and if the loss is determined, the symbol indicating the loss is derived. In deriving any of these symbols, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern, and an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) Is displayed. There is a case where an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the operation means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation validity period is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set at the same time as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. Is assumed. That is, in deriving either the jackpot or the lost symbol, the player operates the operating means by displaying an image prompting either operation and operating the operating means corresponding to the player. As a result, the effect is such that either a big hit or a lost pattern is derived (hereinafter referred to as "decision effect"). It is assumed that the derivation of any of the symbols is automatically displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. In the example of FIG. 109, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (sorry!) Showing that the effect has been lost is displayed (sorry!). "Fluctuating pattern 02"), an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image (big hit !!) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed. 1 It shows how the decorative member 17A is operated (“variation pattern 04”).

Next, FIG. 109 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 and 108, and the distribution is only partially different, so the description thereof will be omitted. Next, FIG. 109 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the determined effect and the operation effect of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship with the execution rate and the relationship between the operation and non-operation of the movable body corresponding to the fluctuation pattern are shown. That is, it can be said that the image display device 14 shows the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the determined effect. The movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

In the "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100". The effect lever 19A is never selected. In addition, the movable body remains inactive due to the fluctuation pattern of the loss. Further, in the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "70/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "30/100". There is. In addition, the movable body remains inactive due to the fluctuation pattern of the loss. Further, in the "variation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "70/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "30/100". There is. Further, since it is a variation pattern of hit, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. 109 (A). Further, in the "variation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100/100". Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. Further, since it is a variation pattern of hit, the movable body operates on the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. 109 (A). That is, in the determined effect, compared to the case where the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated, the case where the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated. It can be said that the rate at which the movable body operates is higher. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

As described above, in the determined effect, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. In the case, by increasing the rate of operation of the movable body, it is possible to pay attention to which operation means the image prompting the operation is displayed in the decision effect. It should be noted that, in the determined effect, the operation valid period of the effect button 18A can be set and the operation valid period of the effect lever 19A can be set when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed. However, in this case, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, the effect of urging the operation only executes the effect of urging the operation of either one of the operating means, but any of the operating means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operating means are provided, the player can operate the operating means that he / she wants to operate, so that the hobby of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the third specific example relating to the state transition, it can be changed as follows. That is, in FIG. 109, even if an image prompting an operation is displayed between "start of fluctuation" and "reach" and between "reach" and "development reach" and the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are operated. Good. Further, in this case, when the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, the effect lever 19A is displayed in the "decision effect" as compared with the case where the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed. The ratio of displaying an image prompting the operation may be increased. Further, as the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Further, an image may be displayed in which only the meter image is displayed and the gauge image is changed according to the operation validity period. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operating means can be operated is displayed.

(Fourth specific example related to state transition, and ninth specific example of distribution of fluctuation pattern and operation means related to fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a fourth specific example relating to the state transition and a ninth specific example of the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of the operating means related to the fluctuation pattern will be described. In FIG. 110, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 01” and “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 110 (B-1) have been determined.

First, FIG. 110A is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of an effect displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the "change start" in which the effect symbol starts to fluctuate, the "reach" in which the reach is formed, the "super reach" that transitions from the "reach", and the "decision effect" performed in the "super reach". It is composed of. Since the "decision effect" is the same as that in FIG. 109, the description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 110 (A), the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is operated and the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is operated at the timing of transition from "reach" to "super reach". It is composed of cases where it is not allowed. Therefore, unlike FIG. 109, the operation and non-operation of the movable body shown in FIG. 110 (B-2), which will be described later, represent the operation and non-operation at the timing of transition from the above-mentioned "reach" to "super reach". ing. That is, in FIG. 110, as shown in FIG. 109, the operation of the movable body does not notify the jackpot, but notifies the transition from "reach" to "super reach". Even if there is, the movable body may operate, and even if it is a variation pattern of hit, the movable body may become inactive. Basically, the higher the expectation for the jackpot is set when the movable body is activated.

Then, the image display device 14 displays an image (development!) Showing the transition to the "super reach" at the timing of the transition from the "reach" to the "super reach" (at the same time, the movable body operates. (There are cases where the movable body does not operate), and when the "super reach" is executed and the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is derived and the loss is determined. Is derived from a symbol indicating an outlier. In deriving either the jackpot or the lost symbol, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the fluctuation pattern, and an image (press the button!) That prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed. In some cases, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (pull the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation validity period of the operation means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation validity period is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set at the same time as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the operation means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. Is assumed. In other words, when deriving one of the symbols, an image prompting one of the operations is displayed and the operating means corresponding to the player is operated, so that the player operates the operating means, which is a big hit. An effect in which one of the lost symbols is derived is performed (similar to FIG. 109, it is called a "decision effect"). It is assumed that the derivation of any of the symbols is automatically displayed after the operation valid period has elapsed if the operating means is not operated during the operation valid period. In the example of FIG. 110, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (sorry!) Showing that the effect has been lost is displayed (sorry!). "Fluctuating pattern 01"), an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image (big hit !!) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed. 1 It shows how the decorative member 17A is operated (“variation pattern 03”).

Next, since FIG. 110 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 to 109 and the distribution is only partially different, the description thereof will be omitted. Next, FIG. 110 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “decision effect” and the operation of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in the low probability gaming state. It shows the relationship with the ratio of executing the effect, and the relationship between the operation and non-operation of the movable body at the timing of transition from "reach" to "super reach" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. That is, it can be said that the image display device 14 shows the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the "decision effect". .. The movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

In the "fluctuation pattern 01 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100". The effect lever 19A is never selected. In addition, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inactive. Further, in the "fluctuation pattern 02 (loss)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100/100". Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, the movable body at the time of reach transition is operating. Further, in the "variation pattern 03 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "100/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "0/100". Therefore, the effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inactive. Further, in the "variation pattern 04 (hit)", the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is "0/100", and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is "100/100". Therefore, the effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, the movable body at the time of reach transition is operating. That is, in the "decision effect", when displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A and operating the effect lever 19A, displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and operating the effect button 18A. It can be said that the rate at which the movable body operates at the time of reach transition is higher than that of the above. Any value can be set for the distribution value.

In this way, in the "decision effect", when the effect lever 19A is operated by displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated. By increasing the rate at which the movable body operates during the reach transition, it is expected that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decision effect" when the movable body operates during the reach transition. Can be made to. In the "decision effect", the operation valid period of the effect button 18A can be set and the operation valid period of the effect lever 19A can be set when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. However, in this case, the effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. That is, the effect of urging the operation only executes the effect of urging the operation of either one of the operating means, but any of the operating means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed while performing an effect that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A. With this configuration, when a plurality of operating means are provided, the player can operate the operating means that he / she wants to operate, so that the hobby of the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the 4th specific example relating to the state transition, it can be changed as follows. That is, in FIG. 110, even if an image prompting an operation is displayed between "start of fluctuation" and "reach" and between "reach" and "development reach" and the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are operated. Good. Further, when transitioning from "reach" to "super reach", the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be operated so that the movable body operates. Further, the first decorative member 17A may be configured to be able to be operated in a plurality of stages. For example, assuming that the first decorative member 17A can be operated from the "1" stage to the "3" stage, the "decision effect" is determined according to the operation stage. The operation means that can be operated in "" may be suggested to be the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. For example, when it is decided to operate the effect button 18A in the "decision effect", it is easy to select the operation up to the "1" stage, and in the "determination effect", the effect lever 19A is operated. If it has been decided, it may be easy to select the operation up to the "3" stage. In such a case, it is possible to predict that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decision effect" depending on to what stage the first decorative member 17A operates at the time of reach transition. Further, a movable body different from the first decorative member 17A is provided, and a "decision effect" is determined depending on whether only the first decorative member 17A is operated, only another movable body is operated, or both are operated. It may be suggested whether the operating means that can be operated in the above is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Even with such a configuration, the same effect can be obtained.

Further, as the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Further, an image may be displayed in which only the meter image is displayed and the gauge image is changed according to the operation validity period. In this case, it can be said that an image indicating that the operating means can be operated is displayed.

(Fifth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a fifth specific example relating to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. 111. In FIG. 111, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) has been determined. Both FIGS. 111 (A) and 111 (B) show the state transition in the “fluctuation pattern 03”. The content shown in FIG. 111 is not limited to the “variation pattern 03”, and can be applied to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern in which the effect button 18A is operated during the “operation valid period”). Further, the following contents shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 can be applied to FIGS. 107 to 110.

First, in case 1 of FIG. 111 (A), it is determined that, for example, the player operates the effect lever 19A when the operation validity period "3S" set in the "decision effect" in the "super reach" elapses. Represents. That is, the effect symbol starts to change at the "start of change", and the "reach" is formed through the "during change". Then, the transition from "reach" to "super reach" is performed, and during the "super reach", an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed on the image display device 14, and the image is displayed and the effect lever 19A is displayed. Set the "operation validity period" (for example, "5S"). That is, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 via the image control board 105 during the “super reach”, and the effect control board 102 displays the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. During the "reach", the effect lever 19A is activated via the lamp control board 104. The term "validation" means that when the player operates the effect lever 19A, the operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104. Then, when "3S" elapses during "5S" of the "operation valid period", the player operates the effect lever 19A, and the first decorative member 17A operates on the front side of the image display device 14. The image display device 14 displays an image (big hit !!) indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. That is, the effect control board 102 is the first decorative member via the lamp control board 104 based on the fact that the operation information is input via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is enabled. The effect control board 102 controls the operation of the 17A, and the effect control board 102 controls the image control board 105 based on the operation information input via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is enabled. Control is performed to display an image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. In addition, for example, in the "decision effect", the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and when the effect lever 19A is enabled, the effect button 18A is activated together with the activation of the effect lever 19A. It may be transformed into. Further, for example, in the "decision effect", when displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and activating the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A may be activated at the same time as the effect button 18A is activated.

Then, after the "operation valid period" has elapsed, the transition to the "waiting period" occurs. The "waiting period" is, for example, a case where the operation is performed in "1S" of the "operation valid period" and a case where the operation is performed in the "3S" of the "operation valid period", and the first decorative member 17A Since the operation timing of the above and the display timing of the image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved will be different, it is a period for adjusting the balance of the time until the "confirmed display" described later is performed. For example, the length of the "waiting period" is different between the case where the operation is performed with "1S" of the "operation valid period" and the case where the operation is performed with "3S" of the "operation valid period", and the "operation" is performed. The "waiting period" when the operation is performed in "1S" of the "valid period" is longer. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (B) described later, when the operation is not performed in the "operation valid period", the first decorative member 17A is activated and becomes a big hit after the "operation valid period" elapses. Since the image indicating that is displayed is displayed, the "waiting period" after the elapse of the "operation valid period" is the shortest as compared with the case where the operation is performed in the "operation valid period". In this "standby period", the image display device 14 displays the fluctuation of the effect symbol (for example, "777") and displays an image or the like indicating that the jackpot has been achieved. Therefore, the fluctuation of the effect symbol (for example, "777") displayed on the image display device 14 depending on whether the operation is performed in the "operation valid period" or not in the "operation valid period". The period for displaying the fluctuation and the period for displaying the image showing that the jackpot has been achieved are different. In addition, when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period", a predetermined effect is performed in the "waiting period", and when the operation is not performed in the "operation valid period", the predetermined effect is performed in the "waiting period". It may not be. In addition, after the "waiting period", a "re-variating period" of the effect symbol is provided, and as a predetermined effect in the "waiting period", an effect of notifying the promotion expectation of the effect symbol in the "re-variation period" is performed. May be good. Here, the "re-variation period" is, for example, when the probabilistic jackpot is determined, the "444" symbol that does not correspond to the probabilistic jackpot is temporarily displayed in the production symbol, and the probabilistic variation is changed from the "444" symbol. This is the period for producing whether or not to promote to the "777" symbol corresponding to the jackpot. In this way, a "re-variation period" is provided after the "wait period", and as a predetermined effect in the "wait period", an effect of notifying the promotion expectation degree of the effect symbol in the "re-variation period" is performed to perform "operation". During the "valid period", the player can motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. When the "waiting period" has elapsed, the "confirmed display" is displayed, and the effect symbol "777" changes from the shaking fluctuation display to the completely stopped stop display.

Next, in the case 2 of FIG. 111 (B), the notification mode of the point that the player did not operate the effect lever 19A in the "operation valid period" is different from the case 1 of FIG. 111 (A). , Other points are common. That is, in FIG. 111 (B), as in FIG. 111 (A), the image display device 14 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and together with the display of the image, the “operation valid period” of the effect lever 19A. Indicates that the player did not operate the effect lever 19A even though the setting was set. In this case, when the "operation valid period" elapses, the first decorative member 17A is operated and an image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed, and when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period". Although the operation timing of the first decorative member 17A and the display timing of the image indicating that the jackpot has been achieved are different from those of the above, the notification mode of the jackpot is the same as when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period". .. However, if the player does not operate the effect lever 19A in the "operation valid period", the "standby period" is shortened as described above, so that the predetermined effect in the "standby period" described above is not executed. It has become like. Therefore, since both the case 1 of FIG. 111 (A) and the case 2 of FIG. 111 (B) have the effect contents based on the "variation pattern 03", the effect etc. basically performed by the image display device 14 or the like. Although they are common, the effect in the "waiting period" after the "operation valid period" elapses is one when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period" and when the operation is not performed in the "operation valid period". The parts are different.

(Sixth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a sixth specific example relating to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In FIG. 112, the description will be made on the assumption that the “variation pattern 01” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) has been determined. Both FIGS. 112 (C) and 112 (D) show the state transition in the “fluctuation pattern 01”. The content shown in FIG. 112 is not limited to the “variation pattern 01”, and can be applied to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern in which the effect button 18A is operated during the “operation valid period”). Further, since FIG. 112 is different from FIG. 111 in whether it is a big hit or a loss, and other points are common to each other, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

That is, in FIG. 112 (C), although the effect lever 19A is operated when "3S" elapses in the "operation valid period", the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the display of an image showing that the jackpot has been achieved are displayed. An image (sorry!) Is displayed to show that the image was lost. Further, in FIG. 112 (D), since the operation was not performed in the "operation valid period", an image (sorry!) Showing that the operation was lost is displayed after the "operation valid period" has elapsed. There is. Then, after the subsequent "waiting period", the "confirmed display" of the production symbol "767" is performed. In the case of FIG. 112, as a predetermined effect in the "waiting period", an effect of notifying the possibility of a reverse jackpot may be performed. Here, the "reversal jackpot" means that when the jackpot is determined in advance, the display mode indicating the loss is changed to the display mode indicating the jackpot before the "confirmed display" is displayed after the "waiting period". Is. With this configuration, as in FIG. 111, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the “operation valid period”.

(7th specific example related to state transition)
Next, a seventh specific example relating to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. 113. Since FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example of a predetermined effect performed during the “waiting period” in FIG. 111 (A), only the points different from those in FIG. 111 (A) will be described.

That is, in FIG. 113 (E), when "3S" elapses in the "operation valid period", the effect lever 19A is operated, the first decorative member 17A is operated, and an image showing that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed. Premier character image (character image that is displayed only when the jackpot is decided) is displayed. In addition, this predetermined premier character image can be displayed only in the "operation valid period", can be continuously displayed from the "operation valid period" to the "waiting period", and becomes the "waiting period". You can also start displaying after that. In this way, by displaying the predetermined premier character image only when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period", the player is motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the "operation valid period". Can be aroused. It should be noted that such a predetermined premier character image may be displayed with a probability of, for example, "1/2" when the operation is performed in the "operation valid period", or in the "operation valid period". When an operation is performed, it may be displayed without fail. Further, if the operation is not performed in the "operation valid period", it may not be displayed. Further, the premier sound (sound output only when the jackpot is determined) may be output from the sound output device 15 together with the display of the predetermined premier character image. With this configuration, the player can further motivate the player to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the “operation valid period”.

(8th specific example related to state transition)
Next, the eighth specific example relating to the state transition will be described with reference to FIG. 114. Note that FIG. 114 (A) shows an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern performed in the low-probability gaming state, and FIG. 114 (B) shows an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern performed in the high-probability gaming state. There is. Further, FIG. 114 (A) shows one aspect of the effect performed in the low-probability gaming state described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110, and FIG. 114 (B) does not refer to FIGS. 107 to 110 and the like. It shows one aspect of the effect performed in the high-probability gaming state.

That is, in FIG. 114 (A), as an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state, after the effect symbol "starts to change", reach is formed through "during change", and then "super reach" It shows that it has evolved into. In this "super reach", it is shown that the symbol indicating the loss is temporarily stopped ("767"), and then the first decorative member 17A is operated to develop into the "special reach". Then, in the "special reach", it is shown that the jackpot symbol is derived after the characters confront each other and the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is operated.

On the other hand, in FIG. 114 (B), as an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in the high-probability gaming state, the transition to the “special reach” is performed after the reach is formed without performing the “super reach” in the low-probability gaming state. It is configured in. That is, FIG. 114 (A) and FIG. 114 (B) differ only in a part depending on whether or not the intermediate "super reach" (including the development effect) is performed, and the other effect contents are the same. In the high-probability game state, it is desired that the so-called right-handed game is performed and the time from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the derivation of the result of whether or not it is a big hit is shorter than in the low-probability game state. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 114 (B), the intermediate "super reach" is omitted, and after the reach is formed, the game is directly developed into a "special reach" to shorten the digestion of the game in the high-probability gaming state. be able to.

(Other changes)
In the above examples of FIGS. 101 to 114, the operation means has been described in relation to the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, but the operation means can be changed as follows.

For example, the effect button 18A is in a position where it can be operated at all times, but the effect lever 19A may be configured so that it can be operated when the effect lever 19A moves to the operable position. Specifically, the effect lever 19A is housed in the gaming machine frame at the initial position, and for example, there is a high probability when a big hit is determined (on the other hand, when a loss is determined). With a low probability), the player can be made to operate the effect lever 19A by moving the effect lever 19A from the initial position to the operable position in the determined effect such as special reach. When the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A may be moved from the initial position to the operable position, and when the operation by the player is detected, the effect lever 19A may be vibrated. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect lever 19A or together with the vibration of the effect lever 19A, a sound notifying the jackpot may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A is easier to move to the operable position (it is easier to change from the first aspect to the second aspect) than when the loss is determined. When the jackpot is determined and the effect lever 19A in the operable position is operated by the player, the effect lever 19A is likely to vibrate or the like (it is easy to change from the second aspect to the third aspect). It can be said. The third aspect may be, for example, a mode in which the light emitting portion provided on the effect lever 19A emits light, or a mode in which the decorative portion is driven to change. It is assumed that the lamp CPU 104a is responsible for these controls. Further, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be provided on the same member, or may be provided on separate and independent members.

Further, it may be configured to include only one of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. For example, when only the effect button 18A is provided, the effect button 18A can be switched between the first mode and the second mode. For example, when a big hit is determined, a high probability (on the other hand, a loss is determined). In the case of a special reach or the like, by switching the effect button 18A from the first aspect to the second aspect, the operation when the effect button 18A is in the first aspect and the operation when the effect button 18A is in the first aspect and the first It can be operated by the operation in the second aspect. The effect button 18A may be vibrated when the jackpot is determined. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, or together with the vibration of the effect button 18A, a sound for notifying the jackpot may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A is more likely to change to the second mode than when the loss is determined, and when the jackpot is determined, the second aspect is adopted. It can be said that when a certain effect button 18A is operated by a player, the effect button 18A is likely to vibrate or the like (it is easy to change from the second aspect to the third aspect). In addition, for example, it may change to a third mode different from the operation mode, the light emitting mode, or the visual recognition mode performed in the second mode. Specifically, the vibration mode of the effect button 18A changes stepwise according to the gaming state, such as from the first mode to the second mode, the third mode, the fourth mode, and so on. It may be one, or a changeable means such as its shape, light emission, rotation, and driving method may be changed stepwise according to the gaming state. In this way, the player's interest can be improved by gradually changing the production according to the game state. It is assumed that the lamp CPU 104a is responsible for these controls.

◆ As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)) and the second state different from this first state. An operating means (effect button (or operating lever, etc.)) that can be changed to (protruding (or vibration, red color, etc.)) and the operating means being operated while the operation is enabled. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that executes a predetermined effect based on the above, and the effect control means is an operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification for urging a player to operate the operation means. In the first operation valid state, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed, the operation means is set to the first state. I try not to make it the second state.

In this way, the gaming machine Y sets the state of the operating means in the first operation enabled state in which the player is prompted to operate the operating means and the second operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It offers a variety of different productions.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y refers to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means, which can be operated by the player. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during the operation enabled state for enabling the operation. The control means refers to the first operating means or the second operating means in the first operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the player is informed of the operation promotion to urge the player to operate the first operating means or the second operating means. Based on the operation, the operation is performed on the first operation means in the second operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in which the predetermined effect is executed according to the operation and the operation promotion notification is not performed. Based on the above, a predetermined effect according to the operation is executed, and even if the second operation means is operated, the predetermined effect according to the operation is not executed.

In this way, the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operation means and the second operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It provides a variety of effects with different operating means used to perform the game.

◆ Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)) and the second state (protrusion) different from the first state. (Or vibration, red color, etc.)) and an effect control means that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated during the operation enabled state in which the operation on the operation means is valid. A gaming machine including a (sub CPU), the effect control means is an operation effective state in which an operation promotion notification for prompting a player to operate the operation means is performed during execution of a game effect related to the game. In the operation enabled state, the operating means is set to the first state or the second state, and in the second operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in the standby state in which the game effect is not executed, the operating means is set to the first state. , The second state is restricted.

As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operating means is performed and the standby state in which the gaming effect is not executed, while the game effect related to the game is being executed. It provides a variety of effects in which the state of the operating means is different from that of the second operation enabled state inside.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y refers to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means, which can be operated by the player. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during the operation valid state for enabling the operation. The effect control means is the first operation enabled state, which is an operation enabled state in which an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the first operating means or the second operating means is performed during the execution of the game effect related to the game. A second operation-enabled state in a standby state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation performed on the first operating means or the second operating means, and the game effect is not executed. In the operation enabled state, a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation being performed on the first operating means, and even if the operation is performed on the second operating means, the predetermined effect according to the operation is performed. Restrict the execution of the production of.

As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the player to operate the operating means is performed and the standby state in which the gaming effect is not executed, while the game effect related to the game is being executed. It provides a variety of effects in which the operation means used to execute a predetermined effect is different from that of the second operation enabled state.

◆ Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the special game by the determination means. By determining that the special game is executed, the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game and the player can operate the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)). Based on the operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to the second state (protrusion (or vibration, red color, etc.)) different from the first state, and the judgment result by the judgment means, the judgment result is determined. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a variable effect using an effect symbol for notifying, and the effect control means is determined based on the operation of the operating means in the variable effect. The effects of the above can be executed, and the predetermined effects include a first effect executed by an operation on the operating means in the first state, a second effect executed by an operation on the operating means in the second state, and a first state or the first effect. A third effect executed by operating the operating means in the second state is included, and in the third effect in the variable effect executed based on the determination that the special game is to be executed by the determining means, the operating means is used. , The second state is set at a higher rate than the first state.

In this way, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the state of the operating means used when executing the third effect at a ratio according to the determination result by the determination means. ..

Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y uses a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the determination means for performing the special game. A special game control means (main CPU) that executes a special game by being determined to be executed, a first operating means that can be operated by the player, and a second operating means that is different from the first operating means. , A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a variation effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means. , A predetermined effect can be executed based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means, and the predetermined effect includes a first effect executed based on an operation on the first operating means and a first effect. 2 The second effect executed based on the operation on the operating means and the third effect executed based on the operation on the first operating means or the second operating means are included, and it is determined that the special game is executed by the determining means. In the third effect in the variable effect executed based on the above, the second operation means is selected at a higher rate than that of the first operation means.

In this way, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by making the selection ratio of the operating means used when executing the third effect different according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

◆ Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the special game by the determination means. A special game control means (main CPU) that executes a special game, a first operation means that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that is different from the first operation means. A gaming machine including, based on the determination result by the determination means, an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a variation effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result, and the effect control means is a variation effect. In the operation promotion effect for encouraging the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the above, a predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means, and in the operation promotion effect, the first operation As an operation for the means, an operation of the first operation type or an operation of a second operation type different from the first operation type is urged, and as an operation for the second operation means, an operation of the third operation type or a third operation. The ratio of urging the operation of the fourth operation type, which is different from the operation of the type, and the ratio of urging the operation of the first operation type and the ratio of urging the operation of the second operation type are different, and the ratio of urging the operation of the third operation type. , The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type is different.

As described above, when the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operating means or the second operating means in the operation promoting effect, the game machine Y operates the first operating means in the operation promoting effect. As a result, the operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different ratios, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different ratios as the operation for the second operation means. Provides a variety of operation promotion effects.

Then, in this operation promotion effect, there is an operation promotion effect that prompts only the operation of the first operation type as the operation for the first operation means, and prompts only the operation of the fourth operation type as the operation for the second operation means.

◆ Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y uses a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the determination means for performing the special game. A special game control means (main CPU) that executes a special game by being determined to be executed, and a specific game that sets a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the end of the special game. Based on the state setting means (main CPU), the operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the effect button), and the determination result by the determination means, the variation effect using the effect symbol for notifying the determination result is performed. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU), the effect control means is a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation means during the operation enabled state in which the operation for the operation means in the variable effect is valid. Is executed, and in the second period after the first period in the specific game state, the operation effective state is set during the variation effect at a higher rate than the first period in the specific game state after the end of the special game. Set.

As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting effect such that the number of effects using the operating means increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

This operating means can be changed into a first state (non-protrusion (or non-vibration, blue color, etc.)) and a second state (protrusion (or vibration, red color, etc.)) different from the first state, and the effect control. The means sets an operation effective state in which the operating means is set as the second state in the second period at a higher rate than in the first period.

As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting effect such that the number of effects using the operating means that becomes the second state increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is executed by using the specific effect determination table of FIGS. 52 to 53. In this determination, it is easier to determine that a specific effect is executed in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and it is easier to determine that a specific effect is executed in a reach effect with a higher expectation of a big hit. Then, when executing the specific effect, it is determined whether or not the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A.

The vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect determines whether the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or at low speed by using the specific effect vibration speed determination table of FIGS. 54 to 55. In the case of a big hit, it is easier to determine that the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed than in the case of a loss, and it is easier to determine that the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed as the reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit. Further, the presence or absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect is determined by using the specific effect sound output determination table of FIGS. 56 to 57. It is easier to determine that a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss, and the more the reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit, the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A. Is output to make it easier to determine. Further, whether or not the image of the effect button 18A is output in the specific effect is determined by using the specific effect image output determination table of FIGS. 58 to 59. It is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output in the case of a jackpot than in the case of loss, and it is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output in the reach effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot.

In this way, when performing a specific effect, any one of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 18A, the presence / absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A, and FIG. As shown, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination. As a result, the expected degree of jackpot can be notified to the player in multiple stages, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation is determined by using the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of a pseudo sound output of the vibrating effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of the image display of the effect button 18A in the specific effect. As suggested, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the size of the image of the effect button 18A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the size of the output sound, and the like may be used. Further, the sound output in the specific effect may be a sound effect peculiar to the specific effect, a specific line, or the like, instead of the pseudo sound of the vibrating effect button 18A. Further, when performing a specific effect, a plurality of types of sounds may be output, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the types of output sounds.

Further, the specific effect may be performed by the vibration of the effect lever 19A instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, or by the lighting or blinking of the LED built in the effect button 18A instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A. It may be an effect that makes 18A appear to be operating. Further, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 18A, and the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested by the presence or absence of the operation of the object and the speed of the operation. Further, the effect button 18A may be rotated to perform a specific effect, and the degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the presence or absence of rotation, the rotation speed, and the rotation direction. Further, the effect button 18A may be projected to perform a specific effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (when the effect mode A is set), which is the normal game state, as shown in FIGS. 44 to 45, the effect which is the first operation means. The ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 18A is higher than the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A which is the second operation means. On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state (when the effect modes B to D), which are the specific game states, the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the second operation means, is performed as shown in FIGS. 46 to 51. The ratio of prompting operation promotion notification is higher than the ratio of performing operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the first operation means. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A, and in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect lever 19A. .. As a result, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of selecting the operation means according to the game state and improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio of the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A are different depending on the game state. Not limited to this, for example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed, and only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is performed, or the high-probability game is performed. In the state and the time-saving game state, the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A may not be performed, and only the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed. Further, for example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving game state, the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed. , The operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect button 18A may not be performed, and only the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect button 18A is used as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operation means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operation means and the second operation means is used. The effect button 18A may be used as the operation means. Further, as the first operation means and the second operation means, a button for effect different from the effect button 18A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, or the like may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A in the low-probability game state and the non-time-saving game state, and the player uses the effect lever 19A in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state. The frequency of doing this is increasing. However, not limited to this, if the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect button 18A and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect lever 19A are different between the first half period and the second half period, for example, in the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. You may let it. In the present embodiment, for example, in the effect mode B, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, which is the first operation means, prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, which is the second operation means. The ratio of the operation promotion notification is higher than the ratio of the operation promotion notification, and in the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the ratio of the operation promotion notification for the operation of the effect button 18A. To do. Further, in the effect mode D, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the effect mode C. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state.

Further, it is possible to execute the reach effect using only the effect button 18A and the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A, and the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect button 18A is high in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time saving game state. In the high, high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, there are two types of effects, one is for the effect button 18A and the other is for the effect lever 19A. In the time-saving game state, the appearance frequency of the effect dedicated to the effect lever 19A may be increased.

In the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, it is possible to execute an effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A a plurality of times, such as "press the button repeatedly". In this case, the operation promotion notification is ". Count as "1 time". For example, even if there is one operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A five times, if there are two operation promotion notifications prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, the player uses the effect button 18A. It can be said that the frequency of using the effect lever 19A is higher than the frequency of using the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are two operation means, that is, the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and more such as the third operation means. It may have a kind of operating means. When three or more types of operating means are provided, the frequency of use of each operating means (the appearance rate of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of each operating means) may be different depending on the gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state as a normal gaming state and a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state as a specific gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. A gaming state such as a probabilistic gaming state and a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state may correspond to a specific gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is a low-probability gaming state and a non-probability gaming state, which is a normal gaming state, as compared with the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, which are the specific gaming states. The rate of execution is higher in the time-saving game state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is lower than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming states. .. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect button 18A.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is a high-probability gaming state that is a specific gaming state and a high-probability gaming state that is a specific gaming state, as compared with the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state that are the normal gaming states. The rate of execution is higher in the short-time game state. That is, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the case of the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, which are the normal gaming states. .. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the effect using the effect lever 19A.

In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is completed, the game machine Y is a specific game that is advantageous to the player as compared with the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state). A so-called state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state) is set, and the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of jackpot determination judgments (the number of times special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 in the specific gaming state. Described as "ST machine". However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the case of being an "ST machine", and the high-probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or, for example, the high-probability gaming state continues 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a "big hit" and a "normal jackpot" in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low-probability gaming state.

When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot game is changed from 1 to 99 times is defined as the above-mentioned "first period", and the jackpot game The period in which the number of changes of the later special symbol is 100 or more may be referred to as the above-mentioned "second period". In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period during the variation effect in the "second period" at a higher rate than the "first period".

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, but can also be used for jigan ball gaming machines and arrange ball gaming machines.

<About other inventions and the like described in the above-described embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions and the like described in the above embodiments will be described.
The other inventions and the like described below include those that can be independently established as inventions and those that can be established in combination with other inventions and the like.

(A) An operation means that can be operated by a player and can be changed into a first state and a second state different from the first state, and an operation effective that enables an operation on the operation means. A gaming machine including an effect control means that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation means during the state, and the effect control means is an operation that urges the player to operate the operation means. In the first operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in which the promotion notification is performed, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and the second operation, which is the operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. A gaming machine characterized in that, in the effective state, the operating means is set to the first state, but is not set to the second state.

(B) A first operating means that can be operated by a player, a second operating means different from the first operating means, and an operation that enables an operation on the first operating means or the second operating means. A gaming machine including an effect control means that executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during the effective state, and the effect control means is provided to the player. In the first operation enabled state, which is the operation enabled state in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation to the first operating means or the second operating means is performed, the operation is performed on the first operating means or the second operating means. Based on the above, the first operation means is operated in the second operation valid state, which is the operation valid state in which the predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed and the operation promotion notification is not performed. Based on this, a gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed, and even if an operation is performed on the second operating means, the predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is not executed. ..

(C) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determining means for determining whether or not to control the special game advantageous to the player and the special game determining means control the special game. In this case, a special game control means for executing the control of the special game, a first operation means that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means. , The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and the game in the normal game state or the specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The operation effect control means is an operation that prompts the operation of the first operation means when the game state control means controls the game in the normal game state. When the ratio of performing the effect is higher than the ratio of performing the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operating means, and the game state control means controls the game in the specific gaming state, the second operating means A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of performing an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means is higher than the ratio of performing an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means.

(D) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determining means for determining whether or not to control the special game advantageous to the player and the special game determining means control the special game. In this case, a special game control means for executing the control of the special game, a first operation means that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means. , The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and the game in the normal game state or the specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The operation effect control means is provided with a game state control means for controlling the game state, and when the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state, the game state control means is the normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of performing an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operating means is lower than that in the case of controlling the game in.

(E) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that the special game determining means for determining whether or not to control the special game advantageous to the player and the special game determining means control the special game. In this case, a special game control means for executing the control of the special game, a first operation means that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means. , The operation effect control means for controlling the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and the game in the normal game state or the specific game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. When the game state control means controls the game in the specific game state, the effect control means puts the game state control means into the normal game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of performing an operation effect for encouraging the operation of the second operating means is higher than that in the case of controlling the game.

<The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment is as follows. ＞

(B) A first operating means that can be operated by the player, a second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute a game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. , The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the specific gaming state. The effect control means includes a control means, and when the first variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control means is more than when the second variation effect is executed in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that an operation effect for encouraging the operation of the first operation means is easily executed. As described above, in the normal gaming state (for example, the low-probability gaming state), the effect of prompting the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect button 18A) is selected rather than the specific gaming state (for example, the high-probability gaming state). Because it is easy to do, it is possible to improve the interest.

(B) A first operating means that can be operated by the player, a second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute a game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. , The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect is executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control means includes a control means, as compared with the case where the first variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution frequency of the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means may be high. As described above, in the specific gaming state (for example, the high-probability gaming state), the effect of prompting the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is higher than that of the normal gaming state (for example, the low-probability gaming state). Since it is easy to select, it is possible to improve the interest, and since the effect using the first operating means is a characteristic effect in the specific gaming state, it is possible to enhance the interest in particular.

◇ (c) When the start condition is satisfied, the special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, and the player can operate the first operation means. A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state, and the first operation state. The first operation means is provided with an effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the first operation means is the first from the first aspect. It is possible to change to the second aspect different from the aspect of the above, and when the effect control means is controlled to the normal gaming state, it is more than the case where it is controlled to the specific gaming state. (1) The frequency of execution of an operation effect for encouraging the operation of the operating means may be high, and when the special game is executed, the first operating means can be easily changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is characterized by the fact that there is. As described above, in the normal game state (for example, the low-probability game state), the effect related to the first operation means (effect button 18A) is more likely to occur than in the specific game state (for example, the high-probability game state), which is special. When it is determined that the game is controlled (at the time of winning), the first operating means is likely to be changed from the first mode (for example, a normal state) to the second mode (for example, a protruding state). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ (d) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, a first operating means that can be operated by the player, and a player can operate the first operating means. A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state, and the first operation state. The second operation means includes the operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and the effect control means capable of executing the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means has the first aspect from the first aspect. When the effect control means is controlled to the specific gaming state, the effect control means can be changed to a second aspect different from the normal gaming state, as compared with the case where the effect control means is controlled to the normal gaming state. It is easy to execute an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operating means, and when it is determined that the special game is to be performed, the second operating means can be easily changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is a feature. As described above, in the specific gaming state (for example, the high-probability gaming state), the effect related to the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is more likely to occur than in the normal gaming state (for example, the low-probability gaming state). , When it is determined to control the special game (for example, at the time of winning), the second operating means is changed from the first mode (for example, a normal state) to the second mode (for example, a vibration state). Because it is easy to make it, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ (e) When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player, a first operating means that can be operated by the player, and a player can operate the first operating means. A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state, and the first operation state. The second operation means includes the operation effect for urging the operation of the operation means and the effect control means capable of executing the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the second operation means has the first aspect from the first aspect. When the effect control means is controlled to the specific gaming state, the effect control means can be changed to a second aspect different from the first operation means, rather than the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means. An operation effect that encourages the operation of the second operating means is easily executed, and when it is determined that the special game is to be performed, the second operating means is likely to change from the first aspect to the second aspect. It is characterized by that. As described above, in the specific gaming state (for example, the high-probability gaming state), the operation of the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed rather than the effect of prompting the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect button 18A). When it is determined that the special game is controlled (for example, at the time of winning), the second operation means is changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example). For example, since it easily changes to a vibrating state), it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(F) A first operating means that can be operated by the player, a second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means, a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state are different. It is possible to execute a game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. , The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the specific gaming state. When the second variation effect is executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control means includes a control means, as compared with the case where the first variation effect is executed in the normal gaming state. When the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means is frequently executed and the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means is performed, the first operation means and the second operation means It is characterized in that any operation can be enabled. In this way, even if only the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed, the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A) can be performed in addition to the second operation means. Since it is effective, the player can play the game by using the operation means that is easy to operate among the plurality of operation means, and can improve the interest of the game.

(G) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means that the player can operate (for example, the main CPU 101a). For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operation means, and an operation effect that encourages the operation of the first operation means. An operation effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) that controls an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, a variation display means (for example, an image display device 14) that performs variation display based on the result of the determination, and the like. The reach effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) that controls the reach effect based on the result of the determination is provided, and the operation effect control means is said to have the reach after the execution of the variation display and before the execution of the reach effect. It is characterized in that the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is easier to execute than after the execution of the effect. In this way, before the execution of the reach effect, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than that of the effect lever 19A being selected, and after the execution of the reach effect, the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the selection ratio of the effect lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which operation means is to be operated when a plurality of operation means are provided.

(H) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) that determines whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and a first operation means that the player can operate (for example, the main CPU 101a). For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operation means, and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. The effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is provided, and the effect control means can execute the specific effect based on the result of the determination, and the specific effect can be executed. After the execution of the effect, it may be easier to execute the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means than before the execution of the specific effect. In this way, before the execution of the specific effect, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than that of the effect lever 19A being selected, and after the execution of the specific effect, the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the selection ratio of the effect lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which operation means is to be operated when a plurality of operation means are provided.

(I) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means that the player can operate (for example, the main CPU 101a). For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operation means, and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. The effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is provided, and the effect control means can execute the specific effect based on the result of the determination, and the specific effect can be executed. As the effect, the first specific effect and the second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect can be executed, and when the first specific effect is executed, the second specific effect is executed. It is characterized in that it may be easier to execute an operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means as compared with the case where the first operation means is operated. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio of the effect button 18A selected is higher than that of the effect lever 19A, and in the second specific effect, the effect button 18A is selected rather than the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the selection ratio of the lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which of the operating means is to be operated when the plurality of operating means are provided.

(N) When the start condition is satisfied, a special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means that the player can operate (for example, the main CPU 101a). For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operation means, and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. The effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is provided, and the effect control means can execute the specific effect based on the result of the determination, and the specific effect can be executed. As the effect, the first specific effect and the second specific effect performed after the execution of the first specific effect can be executed, and when the second specific effect is executed, the first specific effect is executed. It is characterized in that it may be easier to execute an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means, as compared with the case where the second operation means is operated. As described above, in the first specific effect, the ratio of the effect button 18A selected is higher than that of the effect lever 19A, and in the second specific effect, the effect button 18A is selected rather than the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the selection ratio of the lever 19A, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which of the operating means is to be operated when the plurality of operating means are provided.

(L) A first operation means (for example, an effect button 18A) that can be operated by a player, and a first operation detection means (for example, an operation detection switch 18a) that detects that the first operation means has been operated. , A second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) that is operable by the player and different from the first operating means, and a second operation detecting means (for example,) that detects that the second operating means has been operated. , The operation detection switch 19a), the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) that controls the operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means, and the operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and the first. Based on the movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A) that can move from the position to the second position and the detection by the first operation detecting means or the second operation detecting means, the movable means is said to be the movable means. A movable control means (for example, a lamp CPU 104a) capable of controlling movement from a first position to a second position is provided, and the movable control means controls an operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means and detects the detection. Is performed, the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operating means is controlled, and the movable means is easily controlled to be moved from the first position to the second position as compared with the case where the detection is performed. It is characterized by being done. In this way, in the determined effect in which the jackpot determination result is derived by operating the operating means, the effect lever 19A is compared with the case where an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated. In the case of displaying an image urging the operation and operating the effect lever 19A, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates, which operation means is displayed to urge the operation in the determined effect. Can be noticed.

(Wo) A first operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the effect button 18A) and a second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A). An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) that controls an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means, and a second position from the first position. The movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A) and the movable control means (for example, the lamp CPU 104a) capable of controlling the movement of the movable means from the first position to the second position are provided. In the movable control means, when the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means, the effect is compared with the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled. It is characterized in that the movable means is easily controlled to be moved from the first position to the second position before the control by the control means is performed. In this way, when the effect lever 19A is operated by displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the determined effect in which the jackpot determination result is derived by operating the operation means, the effect button 18A is operated. By increasing the rate at which the movable body operates before the control by the effect control means is performed, as compared with the case where the image prompting the effect is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated, before the control by the effect control means is performed. When the movable body is activated, it can be predicted that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent "decision effect".

Further, the "first operating means" may be any operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, buttons, levers, touch panels, handles and the like can be applied.

Further, the "second operating means" may be any operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, buttons, levers, touch panels, handles and the like can be applied.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine used for the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but it may be used for a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball gaming machine.

Y game machine 6 1st starting port 6a 1st starting port detection sensor 7 2nd starting port 7a 2nd starting port detection sensor 8 Grand winning port 9 1st winning gate 10 2nd winning gate 14 Image display device 17A 1st decorative member (Movable member)
17B 2nd decorative member (movable member)
17C 3rd decorative member (movable member)
18A production button (first operation means)
19A production lever (second operating means)
70 Second start port control device 80 Grand prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b main ROM
101c main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c sub RAM

Claims (1)

When the starting condition is satisfied, a special game determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game that is advantageous to the player, and
The first operating means that can be operated by the player,
A second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means.
A game state control means for controlling a game state having a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to determine that the special game is performed than the normal game state.
It is possible to execute an operation effect for urging the operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for urging the operation of the second operation means. In the normal game state, the normal effect determination table is used to perform the specific game. In the state, the effect control means for determining the variable effect and the effect control means for determining the variable effect using the specific effect determination table.
Movable means that can move from the first position to the second position,
A movable control means for moving the movable means from the first position to the second position,
With
The effect control means has a reach effect that is easier to execute when it is determined that the special game is to be performed than when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is not performed, and the special game determination. An effect including a notification effect for notifying the determination result of the special game by means and an effect including
The movable control means
When the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means, the reach effect is produced by the effect control means as compared with the case where the operation effect for prompting the operation of the first operation means is controlled. After the start of the above, before the notification effect is executed, and before the operation effect for prompting the operation of the second operation means is executed , the movable means is moved from the first position to the second position. It is possible to control it easily.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images